Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product. Restrictions The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola. Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others. Trademarks Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents
Traffic Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grade of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity and coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full rate only - High quality over full range of channel errors . . . . . . . . . Half rate only - Improved quality over current HR codec. . . . . . . . . . . . Full and Half rate operation - HR tied to cell congestion . . . . . . . . . . . . Migration to half rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interoperability with GSM half rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM Half Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended range cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity and Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrier Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determine the Number of CCCH per BTS Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiframes and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe - BCCH/CCCH . . . . . . . . . . The 102-frame Dedicated Control Channel Multiframe - SDCCH and SACCH . Multiframes and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 102-frame Control Channel Multiframe - Combined Structure. . . . . . . Parameters which effect the CCCH Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Paging Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of repetitions an MS attempts to access the Network . . . . . . . . . Time MS must wait between repetitions on the RACH . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Capacity Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating CCCH Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGCH Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDCCH Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating SDCCH Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call rate in calls per hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location Update rate in LUs per hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMS rate in SMSs per hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of SDCCH to Physical Timeslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical SDCCH Planning Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSS interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnecting the BSC and BTSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Star connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daisy chain connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daisy chain planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple daisy chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daisy chain with branch BTS site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aggregate Abis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions/limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-22 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-26 1-28 1-30 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-34 1-34 1-36 1-36 1-38 1-40 1-40 1-42 1-42 1-42 1-42 1-43 1-43 1-44 1-44 1-46 1-48 1-48 1-48 1-48 1-49 1-49 1-52 1-52 1-53 1-53 1-53 1-54 1-54 1-55 1-56 1-56 1-57 1-57 1-58 1-59 1-62 1-62
ii
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
RTF path fault containment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 kbit/s RSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fully equipped RTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub-equipped RTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 kbit/s XBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic allocation of RXCDR to BSC circuits (DARBC) Auto-connect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backwards compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Auto-Connect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR and GSM Half Rate Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM half rate basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR and GSM half rate interaction . . . . . . . . . . . New hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality and Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits of AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR Full Rate and AMR Half Rate speech quality . AMR Full Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR half Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR voice quality improvement and coverage . . . . . AMR Potential Coverage Gains. . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits of GSM half rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM Half Rate speech quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity increase due to half rate usage . . . . . . . . Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rate adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codec modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR hr and GSM hr operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-63 1-63 1-66 1-67 1-68 1-68 1-69 1-70 1-70 1-70 1-71 1-72 1-72 1-72 1-72 1-73 1-74 1-75 1-75 1-75 1-76 1-78 1-80 1-80 1-81 1-82 1-82 1-82 1-86 1-86 1-86 1-87 1-87
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
iii
Contents
The Fibre Optic Multiplexer (FMUX) module and FMUX function Overview of FMUX module and internal MCUF FMUX . . . Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module replacement - effect on alarms . . . . . . . . Alarm collection from extension cabinets . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmacro RF Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF modules described . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF general information and loopback test function . . . Receive RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Rx role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (Tx) RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Tx role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF main component explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Tx RF output specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . Location and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU internal boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sectorized Universal Receiver Front end (SURF) module. . SURF module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of 1800 SURF . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of 900 SURF . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (Tx) blocks overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx block overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit block connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of blanking plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Hybrid Combining Unit (HCU) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Twin Duplexed Filter (TDF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Dual band TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band TDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter (DCF) . . . . . . . . DCF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter (DDF) . . . . . . . . Overview of DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Cavity Combining Block (CCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB control board and set switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCB and link redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional description and diagram . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24 2-24 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-36 2-38 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-46 2-46 2-46 2-48 2-48 2-48 2-52 2-52 2-52 2-56 2-56 2-56 2-60 2-60 2-60 2-64 2-64 2-64 2-64 2-68 2-68
iv
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents
HCU function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual hybrid combiner unit (DHU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DHU function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DHU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DHU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between the HIISC and transceivers . . . . Horizon II macro site controller (HIISC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIISC overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link to redundant HIISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact flash card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY MMI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU ethernet port and SYNC/NIU TTY port . . . . . . . PIX interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDRAM, flash EPROM and code loading functions . . . . . SDRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSFP code loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIISC internal architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIU and framers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchanger (TSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU control processor and RSL termination . . . . . . . Site control processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU control processor to site control processor interface Daisy chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span type selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 framing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 N-bit facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 framing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSL configuration and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAPD links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 kbit/s RSLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSL and span alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral HIISC XMUX functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . XMUX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the XMUX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XMUX functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module replacement - effect on alarms . . . . . . . . Alarm collection from expansion cabinets . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module display presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50 3-52 3-52 3-54 3-54 3-56 3-56 3-58 3-58 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-62 3-62 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-72 3-74 3-76 3-76 3-78 3-78 3-80 3-80 3-80 3-80
vi
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
vii
Contents
DINO/RHINO module. . . . . . . . . HDSL module . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules . . . . . . . Main control unit, micro (MCU-m) . . . . . Overview of MCU-m . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA interface . . . . . . . . . . Crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID and calibration data. Memory system . . . . . . . . . Overview of ORAC . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DINO/RHINO . . . . . . Overview of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of HDSL . . . . Overview of line termination modules . Features of line termination modules . HDSL link options . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature overview . . . . . Dual band support . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units . . . . . . . . Configuration data . . . . . . . . . . Single band BTS configurations . . . Single BTS site. . . . . . . . . . Two BTS site . . . . . . . . . . . Three BTS site . . . . . . . . . . Dual band BTS configurations . . . . Two BTS site . . . . . . . . . . . Three BTS site . . . . . . . . . . Antenna options . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirement. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-30 5-32 5-32 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35
viii
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
BSC digital equipment . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital equipment list . . . . . . . . . . Line interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced-line interface board (BIB) . T43 board (T43) . . . . . . . . . . Generic processor (GPROC) . . . . . . Generic processor (GPROC2) . . . . . Generic processor 3 (GPROC3) . . . . Multiple serial interface (MSI) . . . . . . E1 link description . . . . . . . . . Multiple serial interface 2 (MSI-2) . . . T1 link description . . . . . . . . . Transcoder (XCDR) . . . . . . . . . . Generic DSP processor (GDP) . . . . . Kiloport switch (KSW) . . . . . . . . . Double Kiloport Switch 2 (DSW2) . . . . Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) . . . . Generic clock (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . Clock extender (CLKX) . . . . . . . . Local area network extender (LANX) . . Parallel interface extender (PIX) . . . . Battery backup board (BBBX) . . . . . Bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . Digital shelf power supply . . . . . . . Digital shelf redundancy option . . . . . Non volatile memory (NVM) board . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . NVM planning actions . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-19 6-19 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-23
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
ix
Contents
Determining the RSLs required . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC to BTS E1 interconnect planning actions . . . . BSC to BTS T1 interconnect planning actions . . . . Determining the number of LCFs for RSL Processing . Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the number of MTLs required . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate the number of LCFs for MTL Processing . . LCFs for MSC to BSC links . . . . . . . . . . . . MSC to BSC signalling over a satellite link . . . . . . Determining the number of XBLs required . . . . . . . . Feature overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Traffic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard Traffic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic processor (GPROC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 functions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC3 planning assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . BSC types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell broadcast link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMF GPROC required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code storage facility processor . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSP redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pooled GPROCs for LCF and OMF redundancy . BSS Support of Location Services (LCS) . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Advance Positioning Mechanism . . . . . . . E-OTD Positioning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . BSS Support of Location Services (LCS) (cont) . . . . . . A-GPS Positioning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway Mobile Location Centre (GMLC) . . . . Serving Mobile Location Centre (SMLC) . . . . . Location Measurement Unit (LMU) . . . . . . . . Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP/XCDR/EGDP/GDP2 planning considerations . . T1 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Without KSW switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . With KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced GDP Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secondary GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Downgrade on CIC Capability Mismatch . . . . . Feature Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-23 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-30 7-32 7-32 7-32 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-35 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-37 7-38 7-38 7-38 7-39 7-40 7-40 7-41 7-41 7-42 7-42 7-42 7-44 7-44 7-44 7-44 7-46 7-46 7-48 7-48 7-50 7-50 7-52 7-52 7-53 7-54 7-54 7-54 7-56 7-56 7-56 7-58 7-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Planning actions for transcoding at the BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using E1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using T1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple serial interface (MSI, MSI-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI/MSI-2 planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With E1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With T1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kiloport switch (KSW) and Double Kiloport Switch (DSW2) . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW/DSW2 planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX) Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic clock (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock extender (CLKX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN extender (LANX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel interface extender (PIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interfaces (BIB, T43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB/T43 planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital shelf power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup board (BBBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non volatile memory (NVM) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the number of BSU shelves and BSSC2 cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-59 7-59 7-60 7-61 7-61 7-61 7-62 7-62 7-62 7-63 7-63 7-63 7-65 7-66 7-66 7-66 7-67 7-69 7-69 7-69 7-70 7-71 7-72 7-72 7-72 7-72 7-73 7-73 7-73 7-73 7-74 7-74 7-74 7-74 7-75 7-75 7-75 7-75 7-76 7-76 7-76 7-76 7-77 7-77 7-77 7-77 7-78 7-78 7-78 7-78 7-79 7-79 7-79 7-79 7-80 7-80
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
xi
Contents
Chapter overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote transcoder planning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of planning steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR to BSC connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR to BSC links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 interconnect planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 interconnect planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR to MSC links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 interconnect planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 interconnect planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic processor (GPROC, GPROC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC Nemenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP/XCDR planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Without KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning actions for transcoding at the RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using E1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using T1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple serial interface (MSI, MSI-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With E1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With T1 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kiloport Switch (KSW) and Double Kiloport Switch (DSW2) . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX) Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic clock (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock extender (CLKX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN extender (LANX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 4 8- 4 8- 6 8- 6 8- 7 8- 8 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-11 8-11 8-14 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-15 8-15 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-18 8-18 8-19 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-25 8-25 8-26 8-29 8-29 8-29 8-30 8-31 8-32 8-32 8-32 8-32 8-33 8-33 8-33 8-33 8-34 8-34 8-34 8-34
xii
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Parallel interface extender (PIX) . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interfaces (BIB, T43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB/T43 planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital shelf power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply planning actions . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup board (BBBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX planning actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify the number of RXU shelves and BSSC cabinets Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-35 8-35 8-35 8-35 8-36 8-36 8-36 8-36 8-37 8-37 8-37 8-37 8-38 8-38 8-38 8-38 8-39 8-39
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
xiii
Contents
Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC to BTS E1 interconnect planning actions . . . BSC to BTS T1 interconnect planning actions. . . . Determine the number of LCFs for RSL processing . Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the number of MTLs required . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-standard traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate the number of LCFs for MTL processing . LCFs for MSC to BSC links . . . . . . . . . . . Planning actions for transcoding at the BSC . . . . Determining the number of LMTLs required . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the number of LMTLs . . . . . . . . . Traffic model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMTL number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic processor (GPROC2) for LCS . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 functions and types . . . . . . . . . . . Planning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-24 9-25 9-25 9-25 9-26 9-26 9-26 9-27 9-27 9-27 9-28 9-32 9-33 9-33 9-33 9-34 9-34 9-34 9-34 9-34 9-34 9-35 9-35 9-35 9-35 9-35
xiv
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Stage 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector A . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector B . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector C . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector A . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Sector B . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Sector C . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector A . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector B . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector C . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector A . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector B . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector C . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizon Range of Equipment . . . BTS Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC Exercise Number 1 Answers . . BSC Exercise Number 1 Answers . . . BSC Exercise Number 2 Answers . . Number of GPROCs . . . . . . . BSC Exercise Number 3 Answers . . Stage 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC Exercise Number 3 Answers . . . Stage 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stage 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12- 7 12- 7 12- 7 12- 7 12- 8 12- 8 12- 8 12- 9 12- 9 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-15 12-15 12-15 12-16 12-16 12-16 12-17 12-17 12-17 12-18 12-18 12-18 12-18 12-20 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-24 12-24 12-24 12-25 12-25 12-25 12-25 12-26 12-26 12-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
xv
Contents
G Interface - GWY . . . H Interface - Hyperframe I - IWU . . . . . . . . . k - KW . . . . . . . . . L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . M - MUX . . . . . . . . NACK - nW. . . . . . . O - Overlap. . . . . . . PA - PXPDN . . . . . . QA- Quiesent mode . . R - RXU . . . . . . . . S7- SYSGEN. . . . . . T -TxBPF. . . . . . . . U - UUS . . . . . . . . V - VTX host . . . . . . W - WWW . . . . . . . X - X Window. . . . . . ZC . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-28 13-30 13-31 13-36 13-36 13-39 13-43 13-46 13-48 13-54 13-54 13-59 13-67 13-71 13-73 13-75 13-76 13-76
xvi
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version 1 Rev 3
General information
General information
Important notice
Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or any one acting on the customers behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters or recommendations made in Motorola Customer Product Documentation. If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Technical Training manuals are intended to support the delivery of Technical Training only and are not intended to replace the use of Motorola Customer Product Documentation. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
ETSI standards
The standards in the table below able are protected by copyright and are the property of the European Telecommunications Standards Institue (ETSI). ETSI specification number GSM 02.60 GSM 03.60 GSM 03.64 GSM 04.01 GSM 04.02 GSM 04.03 GSM 04.04 GSM 04.05 GSM 04.06 GSM 04.07 GSM 04.08 GSM 04.10 GSM 04.11 GSM 04.12 GSM 04.13 GSM 04.60 GSM 04.64 GSM 04.65 GSM 08.01 GSM 08.02 GSM 08.04 GSM 08.06 GSM 08.08 GSM 08.16 GSM 08.18 GSM 08.51 GSM 08.52 GSM 08.54 GSM 08.56 GSM 08.58 GSM 09.18 GSM 09.60
Figures from the above cited technical specifications standards are used, in this training manual, with the permission of ETSI. Further use, modification, or redistribution is strictly prohibited. ETSI standards are available from http://pda.etsi.org/pda/ and http://etsi.org/eds/
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
General information
Version 1 Rev 3
Feature references
Most of the manuals in the set, of which this manual is part, are revised to accommodate features released at Motorola General System Releases (GSRn) or GPRS Support Node (GSNn) releases. In these manuals, new and amended features are tagged to help users to assess the impact on installed networks. The tags are the appropriate Motorola Roadmap DataBase (RDB) numbers or Research and Development Prioritization (RDP) numbers. The tags include index references which are listed in the manual Index. The Index includes the entry feature which is followed by a list of the RDB or RDP numbers for the released features, with page references and hot links in electronic copy. The tags have the format: {nnnn} or {nnnnn} Where: {nnnn} {nnnnn} The tags are positioned in text as follows: Table 1 New and amended feature information New sentence/s or new or amended text. Complete new blocks of text as follows: Full sections under a main heading Full paragraphs under subheadings Tag position in text Immediately before the affected text. Immediately after the headings as follows: Main heading Subheading is: the RDB number the RDP number
New or amended complete Figures and Tables Warning, Caution and Note boxes. General command syntax, operator input or displays (in special fonts).
After the Figure or Table number and before the title text. Immediately before the affected text in the box. On a separate line immediately above the affected item.
For a list of Roadmap numbers and the RDB or RDP numbers of the features included in this software release, refer to the manualSystem Information: GSM Overview (68P02901W01), or to the manual System Information: GPRS Overview (68P02903W01).
Cross references
Throughout this manual, references are made to external publications, chapter numbers and section names. The references to external publications are shown in italics, chapter and section name cross references are emphasised blue in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page???, and are listed in the table of contents.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version 1 Rev 3
General information
Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the GSM and GPRS network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular countries, this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardised, or may not be present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The manual set, of which this manual is a part, covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the rules differ in individual countries, limitations on the encryption included in the particular software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes that accompany the individual software release.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences. Input Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this. Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRL-c ALT-f CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return key.
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: Safety issue reporting 1 2 3 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power. Make no further attempt to adjust or rectify the equipment. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre, Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 88417733 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China +86 10 68423633 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network Resolution Centre.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version 1 Rev 3
Warnings
A definition and example follow below: Definition of Warning A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment. Example and format WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
A definition and example follow below: Definition of Caution A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel. Example and format CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its due calibration date; arrange for calibration to be carried out.
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
General cautions
Version 1 Rev 3
General cautions
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment. Fibre optics CAUTION Static discharge CAUTION Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices are susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. See the section Devices sensitive to static in the preface of this manual for further information. Fibre optic cables must not be bent in a radius of less than 30 mm.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version 1 Rev 3
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-1
Version 1 Rev 3
1-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter Objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the processes and steps of Cell Planning Explain the factors affecting Site planning Explain the factors and processes of BSC planning Explain the factors and processes of RXCDR planning Calculate control requirements on a cell basis Explain the process for AMR and GSM Half Rate Planning
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Cell Planning
Introduction
When planning a mobile telephone system, the aim is to create a communications system that fulfills the following requirements: Provides the desired capacity Offers good frequency efficiency Implemented at low cost High grade of service
These requirements, when analyzed, actually conflict with one another. Therefore the operating network is always a solution achieved through compromise. The cost of different network configurations can vary considerably. From an engineering point of view it would be worth while using the most frequency efficient solutions despite their high cost, but a mobile telephone network is so huge an investment that the financial factors are always going to limit the possibilities. The effect of limited funds is particularly obvious when the first stage of the network is being built. Consequently, economical planning is a condition for giving the best possible service from the start. The use of the GSM900, EGSM and DCS1800 frequency bands, create many propagation based problems. Because the channel characteristics are not fixed, they present design challenges and impairments that must be dealt with to protect mobile telephone users from experiencing excessively varying signal level and hence voice quality. It is important to be able to predict the RF path loss between the base station and the mobile within the coverage area in different types of environment. To do this it is necessary to have knowledge of the transmitter and receiver antenna heights, the nature of the environment and the terrain variations.
Planning Factors
When planning the network there are a number of major factors which must be considered to enable the overall system requirements to be met. Propagation: The radio path and environment. Traffic Capacity: Unit of measure and grade of service. Subscriber Environment: Handheld and subscriber distribution. Frequency Spectrum: Re-use patterns Carrier/Interference ratio. Sectorisation of sites. Site Planning: Costs. Future requirements.
1-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-5
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
For an EGSM capable mobile established on an SDCCH, if band_preference_mode is set to 1,3 or 5, and EGSM resources are available in the current cell then the BSS will ignore the band_preference_mode setting. If an EGSM MS is established on an EGSM TCH in the outer zone of a dual-band cell, zone handover recognised messages will not be generated.
1-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Better utilisation of radio resources Ordering of Neighbour cells for handover selection: - Type of TCH resource MS established on - Is MS EGSM capable? Assumptions made: SYS04_ch1_p123
No coincident Multiband cells equipped External H/Os assume cell with PGSM BCCH is PGSM only cell No EGSM BCCH frequencies No hopping through EGSM frequencies within PGSM/EGSM cell
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
no EGSM TCHs 5 EGSM 5 PGSM/EGSM cell EGSM 2 1 PGSM/EGSM cell DCS1800 DCS1800 cell
3 EGSM
PGSM/EGSM cell
SYS04_ch1_p125
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-9
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
3 1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
SYS04_ch1_p129
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-13
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Frequency redefinition procedures were incomplete in the Phase 1 GSM specifications; this is addressed in the Phase 2 GSM procedures, but at this time there are no Phase 2 MSs capable of implementing this. Consequently, calls could be dropped, if a single transceiver fails, due to the inability to inform the MSs. Short Message Service, Cell Broadcast The Short Message Service, Cell Broadcast (SMS CB) feature is a means of unilaterally transmitting data to Mobile Stations on a per cell basis. Code Storage Facility Processor Beginning with Software Release 1.3.0.0. the BSS supports a GPROC acting as the Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP). The CSFP allows pre-loading of a new software release while the BSS is operational. When M-Cell BTSs are connected to the BSC a CSFP is required at the BSC and a second CSFP should be equipped for redundancy as required.
1-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Location Services (LCS) LCS provides a set of capabilities that determine location estimates of mobile stations and makes that information available to location applications. Applications requesting location estimates from LCS can be located in the MS, the network, or external to the PLMN. LCS is not classified as a supplementary service and can be subscribed to without subscribing to a basic telecommunication service. LCS is applicable to any target MS, whether or not the MS supports LCS, but with restrictions on choice of positioning method or notification of a location request to the MS user when LCS or individual positioning methods respectively are not supported by the MS. Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) The AMR feature provides enhanced speech quality by adapting the speech and channel coding rates according to the quality of the radio channel, and can provide increased capacity by allocating half rate channels to some or all mobiles. AMR selects the optimum channel rate (full rate (fr) or half rate (hr)) and codec mode (speech and channel bit rates) to provide the best combination of speech quality and system capacity. The feature may be tuned by the network operator on a cell by cell basis in order to obtain the best balance between quality and capacity. GSM Half Rate GSM half rate offers enhanced capacity over the air interface, corresponding to the proportion of mobiles within a coverage area that supports half rate. An air timeslot is split into two sub-channels, each containing a half rate channel. Speech quality is considered inferior to other speech codecs but has a high penetration level (of GSM HR capable mobiles) due to its early introduction into the standards. Due to these large penetration levels it is considered a viable option for high density areas. AMR and GSM Half Rate will be discussed further in the BSS Planning section of this chapter.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
BSS Planning
Initial Information Required The information required before planning can begin can be categorised into three main areas: 1. 2. Traffic Model and Capacity Calculations The information below is required to calculate the capacity required. Traffic Information (Erlangs/BTS) over desired service area. Average traffic per site. Call Duration. Number of handovers per call. Ratio of location updates to calls. Ratio of total pages sent to time in seconds. Ratio intra-BSC handovers to all handovers. Number of TCHs. Half Rate (AMR or GSM) usage. Ratio of SDCCHs to TCHs. Link Utilization. SMS Utilization. Category of Service The information below is required to calculate what category of service is required. Category of service area - urban, suburban or rural: Cell Configuration in each category, sector against omni. Frequency re-use scheme to meet traffic and C/I requirements. Number of RF carriers in cell/sector to support traffic. Grade of Service of the Trunks (BSC/MSC). Grade of Service of the Traffic Channels. Cell Grid plan, a function of: Desired grade of service or acceptable level of blockage. Typical cell radio link budget. Results of field tests.
1-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
3.
Site Planning The information below is required to plan each site. Where the BSC/BTS will be located. Local restrictions affecting antenna heights, equipment shelters, for example. Number of sites required. Re-use plan (frequency planning) omni or sector: Spectrum availability. Number of RF carrier frequencies available. Antenna type(s) and gain specification. Diversity requirement. Redundancy level requirements. Supply voltage.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Traffic
Introduction One of the most important steps in cellular planning is system dimensioning. To dimension a system correctly and hence all the supporting infrastructure, some idea of the projected usage of the system must be obtained i.e. the number of people wishing to simultaneously use the system. This means traffic engineering. Consider a cell with N voice channels, the cell is therefore capable of carrying N individual simultaneous calls. The traffic flow can be defined as the average number of concurrent calls carried in the cell. The unit of traffic intensity is the Erlang, traffic defined in this way can be thought of as a measure of the work load carried by the voice cell. The maximum traffic the cell can carry is N Erlangs, this happens if there is a call on each voice channel all of the time. If during a time period T, a channel carries traffic, then the average is T/N, this ratio is measured in Erlangs.The total traffic carried by the cell is the sum of the traffic carried by each channel. The mean call holding time is the average time a channel is serving a call. Channel Blocking The standard model used to dimension a system is the Erlang B model, which models the number of traffic channels or trunks required or a given grade of service and given offered traffic. There will be times when a call request is made and all channels or trunks are in use, this call is then blocked. The probability of this happening is the grade of service of the cell. If blocking occurs then the carried traffic will be less than the offered traffic. If a call is blocked, the caller may try again within a short interval. Repeated call attempts of this type increase the offered traffic above the level if there had been an absence of blocking. Because of this effect the notion of offered traffic is somewhat confused, however, if the blocking probability is small, it is reasonable to ignore the effect of repeated call attempts and assume that blocked calls are abandoned. The number of calls handled during a 24 hour period varies considerably with time. The figure opposite shows the type of traffic load that might be expected on a typical call. There are usually two peaks during week days, although the pattern can change from day to day. Across the typical day the variation is such that a l hour period shows greater usage than any other. From the hour with the least traffic to the hour with the greatest traffic, the variation can exceed 100:1. To add to these fairly "regular" variations, there can also be unpredictable peaks caused by a wide variety of events e.g. the weather, natural disasters, conventions, sports events etc. Additional to this, the fact that system growth must also be taken into account. There are a set of common definitions to describe this busy hour traffic loading. Busy Hour: The busy hour refers to the traffic volume or number of call attempts, and is a continuous period lying wholly in the time interval concerned for which this quantity (ie traffic volume or call attempts) is the greatest. Peak Busy Hour: The busy hour each day it is not usually the same over a number of days. Time Constant Busy Hour: The 1 hour period starting at the same time each day for which the average traffic volume or call attempts count is greatest over the days under consideration. Busy Season Busy Hour: The engineering period where the grade of service criteria is applied for the busiest clock hour of the busiest weeks of the year. Average Busy Season Busy Hour: The average busy season busy hour is used for trunk groups and always has a grade of service criteria applied. For example, for the ABSBH load, a call requiring a circuit in a trunk group should not encounter "all trunks busy" (ATB) no more than 1% of the time. Peak loads are of more concern than average loads when engineering traffic routes and switching equipment.
1-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
120
100
Traffic Intensity
Busy Hour Peak Busy Hour Time Constant Busy Hour Busy Season Busy Hour Average Busy Season Busy Hour
80
60
40
20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Hour of day
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-19
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Traffic Flow If mobile traffic is defined as the aggregate number of mobile calls (C) in a cell with regard to the duration of the calls (T) as well as their number, then traffic flow (A) can be defined as: Traffic Flow (A) = C x T Where C is the calling rate per hour and T is the average holding time per call. Suppose an average hold time of 1.5 minutes is assumed and the calling rate in the Busy Hour is 120, then the traffic flow would be 120 x 1.5 = 180 call-minutes or 3 call hours. One Erlang of traffic intensity on one traffic channel means a continuous occupancy of that particular traffic channel. Considering a group of traffic channels, the traffic intensity in Erlangs is the number of call-seconds per second or the number of call hours per hour. As an example; if there were a group of 10 traffic channels which had a call intensity of 5 erlangs, then half of the circuits would be busy at the time of measurement. Grade of Service One measure of the quality of service is how many times a subscriber is unsuccessful in setting up a call (blocking). Blocking data states what grade of service is required and is given as a percentage of the time that the subscriber is unable to make a call. Typical blocking for the MS-BSC link is 2% with 1% being acceptable on the BSC-MSC link. There is a direct relationship between the grade of service required and the number of channels. The customers desired grade of service has a direct affect on the number of channels needed in the network.
Introduction to AMR
AMR offers two very strong benefits: Expands network capacity, via AMR Half Rate. Expands the area of high call quality coverage, via AMR Full Rate. The ability of the AMR codec to dynamically change the allocation of source and channel coding bits provide a high level of speech quality. The overall improvements are dependant upon channel quality (C/I). As channel quality deteriorates, a codec with a higher level of error protection (and a corresponding decrease in speech quality) is selected, leading to an increase in sensitivity of the transceivers, thus providing optimum performance. The half rate (hr) ability of AMR, which allows for two calls per timeslot, provides the largest increase in capacity, but at a cost of a decrease in voice quality. Initially the AMR capable MS penetration rate may be low, suggesting that in circumstances where capacity is paramount and voice quality secondary that GSM half rate be employed as an alternative. With AMR operating in full rate mode, or in a mix of full rate and half rate where handovers between the modes is permitted, a capacity gain can be realized as a result of being able to operate at a lower C/I threshold. This can result in potentially higher traffic loading. Note, however, that the benefits of AMR do not extend to the signalling channels, or to the use of non-AMR codecs and data services. Capacity gains of this type are very dependent upon other factors (e.g. propagation conditions) and any improvement gained by a replanning of existing systems should be considered with care. The 3GPP document, TR 46.076, Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec; Study Phase Report, is a summary of a report on AMR which contains additional information regarding the technical aspects and benefits.
1-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
AMR Full Rate Coverage Area AMR Half Rate Coverage Area
Timeslot 2 2 3
16 kbit/s
Timeslot 3 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 kbit/s
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-21
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Quality of Service
AMR Full Rate delivers improved voice quality in poorer radio environments, providing high quality in poorer signalling conditions: AMR Full Rate will offer higher quality voice communications in poor radio environments such as corporate and urban buildings where no dedicated in-building coverage has been provided. AMR Full Rate will improve voice quality across the entire network, by supporting high quality voice codecs in radio environments that cannot support Enhanced Full Rate (EFR). AMR Full Rate expands the area of high quality voice coverage within a cell by intelligently selecting the best from a selection of codecs in various radio environments. Notice that in comparison to the EFR curve, AMR Full Rate offers a significantly higher quality codec solution in marginal radio environments (C/I = 13 to 4 dB). This, therefore, enables operators to offer high voice quality in radio environments that will not support EFR. Note that this improvement is paramount in urban environments, which usually have a C/I of between 11 and 13 dB.
1-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Quality of service
In good radio environments: AMR Full Rate voice quality = good EFR voice qauility Mean Opinion Score (MOS) of Voice Quality
5.0
4.0
2.0
1.0
No Errors
C/I = 16dB
C/I = 13dB
C/I = 10dB
C/I = 7dB
C/I = 4dB
C/I = 1dB
Conditions
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Applications
With the flexibility of the AMR system, it is possible to customize the application of AMR to meet specific network and service needs. Some of the potential application scenarios are identified below (in no particular order) together with the advantages offered and the types of networks to which they may be suited. Full rate only - High quality over full range of channel errors Due to the robust error correction ability of AMR, this provides improved resilience to errors compared to GSM EFR so that when in call, the speech quality varies little with channel errors. It also provides significantly improved quality under marginal coverage conditions (e.g. at cell edge, coverage holes, etc.). Some capacity advantage may also be derived from the improved resilience under low C/I conditions. May support tighter frequency re-use. Potential service applications: suitable for operators who do not need to increase capacity through half rate operation, but wish to offer the best speech quality possible to all users. Half rate only - Improved quality over current HR codec To gain maximum capacity advantage, the AMR codec can be operated in half rate channel mode only. Potential service applications: suitable for operators who need the greatest capacity enhancement from half rate operation. Some loss of quality at high channel error rates and in background noise can be expected. Full and Half rate operation - HR tied to cell congestion In this case full rate is used until cell congestion triggers a switch to use of half rate channels. The operator may also specify a handover of half rate capable mobiles from a full rate channel to a half rate channel in order to help ease the congestion. This provides a tunable trade-off between call quality and capacity. Potential service applications: suitable for operators who want to combine speech quality and capacity improvements.
1-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
The backhaul between the BTS and BSC may be 8kbps or 16kbps. 8kbps requires that subrate (8K) switching is present at the BSC. The existing hardware only supports 16 kbit/s switching on the backhaul between the BSC and BTS. Therefore, when using existing switching hardware, each half rate equipped RTF must have an additional two 64 kbit/s timeslots equipped in order to fully utilize all 16 half rate channels. The existing hardware will also support only 16 kbit/s switching on the backhaul between the BSC and RXCDR (this interface is called the Ater interface), requiring 16 kbit/s per voice channel (as it does currently). The Double Kiloport Switch (DSW2) supports subrate switching capability down to 8 kbit/s (extended subrate switching mode), as well as double the number of ports (enhanced capacity mode) when used in the RXCDR. With 8 kbit/s switching between the BSC and BTS, a half rate voice stream can be carried in a 8 kbit/s subchannel, rather than the 16 kbit/s subchannel required with KSWs. This eliminates the need for the 2 additional 64 kbit/s timeslots required per half rate capable RTF. As with AMR half rate, a GSM half rate call can fit within an 8kbps timeslot (an Ater channel) on the terrestrial resource from the BSC to the RXCDR, rather than the 16kbps timeslot required for full rate calls. If a percentage of the active calls can be assumed to be half rate, then efficiency can be gained by reducing the number of terrestrial resources between the BSC and RXCDR. The DSW2 benefit of 8 kbit/s subrate switching allows this capability to be realized. In order to maximize Ater channel usage, dynamic assignment of BSC to RXCDR channels is employed. The BSC can assign an 8 or 16 kbit/s channel as required, based upon the backhaul in use across the BSCBTS interface. This allows the operator to equip fewer channels than previously possible, with the assumption that a number of calls will always be utilizing half rate backhaul. This dynamic allocation is an enhancement to the existing Auto Connect mode feature, referred to as Enhanced Auto Connect mode. Enhanced Auto Connect is applicable to both AMR and GSM half rate.. Extended range cells GSM half rate is only supported on the normal range timeslots. It is not supported on extended range timeslots (it is envisaged that the C/I ratio in the extended range portion of an extended range cell will not be good enough to support a half rate call).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Capacity and Coverage As with AMR half rate, GSM half rate doubles the number of voice calls that can be supported over the air interface, thus allowing up to double the number of subscribers to be supported by a base station. This is achieved by halving the air interface capacity necessary to support a single voice call using GSM half rate. On the backhaul it is possible to support 8 voice calls per E1 timeslot instead of 4 when 8 kbit/s backhaul is used.
1-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
AMR Full Rate, Enhanced Full Rate and Full Rate coverage area
Timeslot 2 2 3 4 1 16 kbit/s
Timeslot 3 2 3 4
123456781234567812345678 8 kbit/s
2 X voice calls supported per timeslot in GSM Half Rate coverage area
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-27
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Quality of service The GSM half rate codec does not perform as well as the AMR half rate codec. The following figure shows the Mean Opinion Scores (MOS) for the various coding schemes versus C/I (the 4.75 <-> 7.95 values are for AMR half rate). This provides a relative comparison of voice quality vs. the other codecs.
1-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Quality of Service
5 4.5 EFR 4 3.5 FR HR 7.95 kbps 7.4 kbps 6.7 kbps 5.9 kbps 5.15 kbps 4.75 k 1.5 1 Error Free 19 16 13 C/I (dB) 10 7 4
MOS
SYS04_ch1_03d
3 2.5 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-29
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Subscriber Density
Cell 1
24 TCH
Cell 3
20 TCH
Cell 2
85 TCH
Subscriber Density
Subscriber Density
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-31
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
BCCH Group
The Broadcast Control Channels are downlink only (base station to mobile) and comprise of the following: BCCH carries info about the network, a mobiles present cell and the surrounding cells. It is transmitted continuously as its signal strength is measured by all mobiles on surrounding cells. The Synchronising Channel (SCH) carries information for frame synchronisation and Base Station Identity Code (BSIC). The Frequency Control Channel (FCCH) provides information for carrier synchronisation.
CCCH Group
The Common Control Channel Group is bi-directional ie, it works in both the uplink and downlink direction. It comprises of the following: Random Access Channel (RACH) is the up link used by mobiles to gain access to the system. Paging Channel (PCH) and Access Grant Channel (AGCH) operate in the downlink direction. The AGCH is used to assign resources to the M.S, such as a Standalone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH). The PCH is used by the system to call a mobile. The PCH and AGCH are never used at the same time.
DCCH Group
Dedicated Control Channels are assigned to a single mobile for call set-up and subscriber validation. DCCH comprises of the following: Standalone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) which supports the transfer of Data to and from the mobile during call set-up and validation. Associated Control Channel. This consists of Slow ACCH which is used for radio link measurement and power control messages. Fast ACCH is used to pass event type messages eg, handover messages. Both FACCH and SACCH operate in uplink and downlink directions.
1-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Control Channels
CCH
Control Channel
NB NB/AB NB/DB
Acronyms!! NB = Normal Burst FB = Frequency Burst SB = Synchronisation Burst AB = Access Burst DB = Dummy Burst
DCCH
- downlink only
BCCH
SDCCH
ACCH
BCCH
Synch. Channels
SB
FACCH SACCH SCH
BSIC
FB
FCH
CCCH
AB
RACHuplink
NB
PCH/AGCH - downlink CBCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-33
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-35
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
BCCH/CCCH Multiframe
50
I C C
KEY R= B= F= S= C= I= RACH (Random) BCCH (Broadcast) FCCH (Frequency) SCH (Sync.) CCCH (Common) Idle
50
40
S F C C
40
30
S F C C
30
20
S F C C
20
10
S F C B
10
S F
Downlink
Uplink
0
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-37
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
The 102-frame Dedicated Control Channel Multiframe - SDCCH and SACCH The diagram shows the 51-frame structure used to accommodate 8 SDCCHs although, as it takes two repetitions of the multiframe to complete the entire sequence, it may be more logical to think of it as a 102-frame structure! This structure will be used on a physical channel selected by the system software - it is not placed in a timeslot or on an RF carrier specifically defined by GSM Recommendations. Note that the 8 SACCHs (shaded) are associated with the 8 SDCCHs. It is important to remember that each SDCCH has an SACCH just like a traffic channel.
1-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
DCCH Multiframe
50
I I I A3 A2 A1 A0
I I I A7 A6 A5 A4 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
50 A0 D7 40 D6 D5 D4 30 D3 D2 20 D1 D0 I I I 10 A7 A6 D3 D2 D1 D0 I I I A3 A2 A1 A4 D7 D6 D5 D4
40
30
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
20
10
D2 D1 D0
Downlink
Uplink
A5
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-39
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Combined Multiframe
50
I A1 A0
I A3 A2 S F D3 D2 S F D1 D0 S F C C S F C B S F
KEY R = RACH (Random) B = BCCH (Broadcast) F = FCCH (Frequency) S = SCH (Sync.) C = CCCH (Common) D = SDCCH/4 (Dedicated) A = SACCH/C4 (Associated) I = Idle
50 D2 R R D1 D0 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R A3 A2 R R D2 R R D1 40 D0 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R A1 10 A0 R R D3 0
40
S F D3 D2
30
S F D1 D0
30
20
S F C C
20
10
S F C B
S F
Downlink
Uplink
D3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-41
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
1-42
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
(1) Location update factor L is a function of the ratio of location updates to calls (I), the ratio of IMSI detaches to calls (I) and whether the short message sequence (type 1) or long message sequence (type 2) is used for IMSI detach. For typical planning parameters I= 0 (IMSI detach is disabled). If IMSI attach is enabled the alternative formulas should be used. The type of IMSI detach used is a function of the MSC. If IMSI Detached is Disabled L = I If IMSI Detached Type 1 is Enabled L= I + .2 * I If IMSI Detached Type 2 is Enabled L= I + .5 * I
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-43
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Paging Blocks The first task is to calculate the number of pages per second that will be transmitted by the cell. Remember that paging in GSM is carried out on a LAC basis and therefore the number of paging blocks calculated will be the same for every cell within the LAC. The number of paging blocks required can be calculated using the following formula:
The value of P (pages per second) must be calculated first. The following example will illustrate this: 40,000 subscribers in a location area (LAC) each subscriber is allocated 0.025 Erls total erlangs in the LAC = 1000 Erls each call will have a duration of 120 seconds
call rate = 30,000 calls/hour 20% are on average mobile terminating 20% of 30,000 = 6,000 On average 2 pages are sent for every call that is set up. pages per hour = 12,000 pages per second =
value of P = 3.33 The number of pages per second is divided by the paging capacity of a CCCH block. Two factors are included in this, firstly the number of pages in a paging message (TMSI = 4, IMSI = 2) and then the number of repetitions of the paging block per second (4.25). The final figure will give the number of paging blocks required. The result of this calculation will always tend to be rather low, GSM has a huge paging capacity which is rarely fully utilised. The number of pages/second the cell is capable of is dependent on the configuration of the CCCH channels. Combined Multiframe Non Combined Multiframe 51 pages/sec (TMSI) 25.5 pages/sec (IMSI) 153 pages/sec (TMSI) 76.5 pages/sec (IMSI) AGCH Blocks To calculate the number of AGCH channels required, three factors must be considered, the Call Rate, the Location Update Rate and the SMS Call Rate. The two latter factors can be determined by using a ratio of the Call Rate.
1-44
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
AGCH = CALL + LU + SMS + LCS 3600 CALL LU = E x 3600 T = L x E x 3600 T SMS LCS Where: = SMS x E x 3600 T = LCS x E x 3600 T E = total erlangs per cell T = average call duration L = ratio of LU's to calls T = average call duration LCS = ratio of LCS's to calls SMS = ratio of SMS messages to calls
The next step is to calculate the number of AGCH blocks required using the following formula:
The two factors being used for the division are based on the capacity of an AGCH block. Two immediate assignment messages can be sent in one CCCH block and also a CCCH block repeats at a rate of 4.25 times per second. Final Step The last step is to combine the NAGCH and NPCH together and divide by a CCCH utilisation figure usually set at 0.33 (33%). CCCH utilization is the average percentage of time the CCCH is busy (during the busy hour or the busy half-hour). However, it is a matter of the system engineers preference, therefore typically a value such as 0.33 (33%) is selected to allow for peaks as well as to minimize queueing delays. The final figure will give the number of CCCH blocks required. CCCH Blocks Required
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-45
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
SDCCH Requirements
There are a number of factors that will effect the SDCCH requirements in a GSM Cell. The first is the requirement of supporting call set up in a cell. As more mobile stations try to access the system in a cell, the cell will process more random access requests (RACH) on the Common Control Channel. Note, that if a Mobile Station is paged by the system on the Common Control Channel, the Mobile Station will respond with a RACH to try and access the system. As more Mobile Stations try to access the system in that cell, the demand for SDCCHs to support call set-up, subscriber and equipment authentication will increase. One factor which will greatly affect the number of TCHs in a cell is the use of AMR or GSM Half Rate. The figures in the tables following assume the worst case in that all half rate capable carriers are being used as half rate. The second factor is whether the cell being configured is on a system supporting the GSM defined Short Message Service (SMS) feature. For a mobile Station to receive the Short Message Service data the mobile station (if not on a traffic channel) must access the system using a random access request and move onto a SDCCH prior to receiving the data. Therefore, if Short Message Services are to be supported as a feature, it must be taken into account when determining and calculating your SDCCH requirement in a cell. The third factor is to do with the location of the cell. Each MSC in a GSM system will divide the GSM cells associated with that MSC into location areas. The size of these location areas are defined by the System operators. The MSCs VLR uses these location areas to keep track of Mobile Stations, as they move through the MSCs area of responsibility. As a Mobile Station moves between MSC location areas, the Mobile Station must perform a location update. This is done on a SDCCH. It should also be noted that a mobile may perform a location update after a preset delay has elapsed since the mobiles last location update. Thus, if a GSM cell is on the border of a MSC location area, there will be more instances of mobiles performing location updates in that cell, than a cell at the centre of a MSC location area.
1-46
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
Town Area
Cell 6
Cell 4
TOWN AREA
Cell 7
Cell 2 Cell 1
Cell 8
Cell 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-47
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
Time duration for location updates Time duration for SMS(short message service set-up) Time duration for LCS set-up Time duration for call set-up Guard time for SDCCH Call arrival rate per hour Location Update rate per hour
1-48
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS rate per hour SMSs per hour To determine the erlangs offered for SDCCHs: Erlangs offered =
LCS SMS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-49
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Planning
CBCH reduces the number of SDCCH by one and may require another channel to be equipped.
1-50
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Planning
Version 1 Rev 3
There is a limit of 44 (combined) or 48 (non-combined) SDCCH per cell. This may limit the number of supportable TCHs within a cell.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-51
Version 1 Rev 3
BSS interfaces
BSS interfaces
Introduction
The following figure and table indicate the type of interface, rate(s) and transmission systems used to convey information around the various parts of the BSS system.
OMC-R
OML
X.25 (LAPB)
MSC
MS
BTS
BSC
RXCDR
CBL
X.25 (LAPB)
CBC
Interface Air
From/To MS - BTS
Signalling by ... RACH, SDCCH, SACCH, FACCH E1/T1 links RSL MTL (OML, CBL) XBL OML (X.25) CBL (X.25)
Rate
BTS - BSC BSS - MSC RXCDR - BSC MSC - OMC-R MSC - CBC
1-52
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Interconnection rules
The following rules must be observed when interconnecting a BSC and BTSs: The BSC may share MSI boards between BTSs. When there are two or more E1 or T1 circuits, at least two MSIs are recommended for redundancy. A minimum of one MSI is required at each BTS. There is a maximum of eight, and minimum of one, signalling links per BTS site, each requiring one 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1 or T1 circuit. The maximum number of active carrier units is determined by available E1 circuit capacity. Typically, a carrier unit requires two 64 kbit/s timeslots on an E1 circuit. A RTF may be configured as half rate capable, meaning it may support AMR half rate and/or GSM half rate. Once a RTF is configured as AMR half rate capable, and (if AMR half rate is enabled) the 7.95 kbit/s half rate codec mode is included in the Half Rate Active Codec Set or (for either AMR half rate or GSM half rate) 8 kbit/s subrate switching is not available (for example, 16kbit/s is used for the backhaul), then the carrier unit assigned to that RTF will require four 64 kbit/s timeslots on the E1 circuit In a redundant connection, each carrier unit requires two 64 kbit/s timeslots on two different E1 circuits. Four 64 kbit/s timeslots are required if the half rate exception case applies. The AMR half rate exception case is defined as "A carrier which is assigned an RTF configured as (AMR or GSM) half rate capable, and 8 kbit/s subrate switching is not available (for example, 16kbit/s is used for the backhaul), or (for AMR) the 7.95 kbit/s half rate codec mode is included in the Half Rate Active Codec Set". The Half Rate Active Codec Set is AMR specific and is configured on a per cell basis. At the BSC, one E1 or T1 circuit is required to connect to a daisy chain. If the connection is a closed loop daisy chain, two E1 or T1 circuits are required. To provide redundancy, the two E1 or T1 circuits should be terminated on different MSIs. In a closed loop daisy chain the primary RSLs for all BTS sites should be routed in the same direction with the secondary RSLs routed in the opposite direction. For In-Cell equipment, the primary RSL at each BTS site in the daisy chain should always be equipped on the multiple serial interface link (MMS) equipped in cage 15 slot 16 port A. The secondary RSL at each BTS site should be equipped on the MMS equipped in either cage 15 slot 16 port B or cage 15 slot 14 port A or cage 14 slot 16 port A. For MCell and Horizon equipment, the default RSL locations are cage 0 NIU0 MMS 0 timeslot 1, cage 0 NIU0 MMS 1 timeslot 2, cage 1 NIU0 MMS 0 timeslot 2
The following rules must be observed when interconnecting InCell and M-Cell equipment: Reconfigure the InCell BTS to have integral sector(s) in the cabinet. Install M-Cell cabinet(s) to serve the remaining sector(s). Daisy chain the M-Cell E1/T1 links to the BSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-53
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
Network topology
Introduction
The user can specify what traffic is to use a specific path. Any direct route between any two adjacent sites in a network may consist of one or more E1 or T1 circuits. shows a possible network topology. Each BTS site in the network must obey the following maximum restrictions: Six serial interfaces supported at a HorizonIImacro BTS. Six serial interfaces supported at a Horizonmacro BTS. Two serial interfaces supported at a Horizonmicro2/Horizoncompact2 BTS. Six serial interfaces supported at an M-Cell6 BTS. Four serial interfaces supported at an M-Cell2 BTS. Two serial interfaces supported at an M-Cellcity / M-Cellcity+ BTS. Six serial interfaces supported at an M-Cell access BTS. Ten BTS(s) in a path, including the terminating BTS for E1 circuit connection or eight BTS(s) in a path, including the terminating BTS for T1 circuit connection.
One RSL signalling link per HorizonIImacro or Horizonmacro BTS site. Four RSL signalling links per M-Cell BTS site (maximum of two per path). An alternative path may be reserved for voice/data traffic in the case of path failure. This is known as a redundant path, and is used to provide voice/data redundancy, that is loop redundancy. The presence of multiple paths does not imply redundancy. Each signalling link has a single path. When redundant paths exist, redundant signal links are required, and the signalling is load shared over these links. In the case of a path failure, the traffic may be rerouted, but the signalling link(s) go out of service, and the load is carried on the redundant link(s).
BSC
BTS 10
BTS 1
BTS 5
BTS 2
BTS 6
BTS 11
BTS 3
BTS 7
BTS 9
BTS 4
BTS 8
1-54
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
Star connection
A star connection is defined by installing E1 or T1 circuits between each BTS site and the BSC, as shown in the figure. A star connection may require more MSI cards at the BSC than daisy chaining for the same number of BTS sites. The star connection will allow for a greater number of carrier units per BTS site. An E1 circuit provides for 15 carriers plus one signalling link. A T1 circuit provides for 11 carriers plus one or two signalling links.
BSC
BTS 5
NOTE
The number of carriers on an E1 circuit is reduced by 1 for each carrier to which the half rate exception case applies.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-55
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
BTS 3 BTS 2
DAISY CHAIN CLOSED LOOP
BTS 4 BTS 10
BTS 1
BTS 6 BTS 5
BSC
MSC
BTS 11 BTS 7
SINGLE MEMBER DAISY CHAIN, A STAR
BTS 9
BTS 8
1-56
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
Simple daisy chain A daisy chain with no branches and a single E1 or T1 circuit between each of the BTSs is referred to as a simple daisy chain, a simple daisy chain is shown in the figure shown here. The maximum capacity supported in this connection is limited by the capacity of the connection between the BSC and the first BTS in the chain.
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
BSC
Rx Tx
BTS 1
Rx Tx Rx Tx
BTS 2
Tx Rx Tx
Rx
BTS 3
Rx Tx
BTS 4
BTS X
The capacity of a closed loop single E1 or T1 circuit daisy chain is the same as that for an open ended daisy chain. The closed loop daisy chain has redundant signalling links for each BTS, although they transverse the chain in opposite directions back to the BSC. Maximum carrier capacity of the chain, with one signal link per BTS site is given by: for E1 links
for T1 links.
Where:
n b
is:
The results should be rounded down to the nearest integer. NOTE Example A single E1 circuit daisy chain with three BTSs, with 3 carriers designated half rate and to which the half rate exception case applies, the maximum capacity of the chain is given by: The number of E1 carriers is reduced by 1 for each carrier to which the AMR half rate exception case applies.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-57
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
A single T1 circuit daisy chain with three BTSs, the maximum capacity of the chain is is given by:
These carriers can be distributed between the three sites. If the loop is closed, the BSC has additional signalling links, although the same number of carriers are supported. Daisy chain with branch BTS site The addition of a branch BTS site (BTS Y), as shown in , affects the capacity of the links between the BSC and the site from which the branch originates as these are used for the path to the branched site.
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
BSC
Rx Tx
BTS 1
Rx Tx
BTS 2
Rx Tx Tx Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
BTS 3
Rx Tx
BTS 4
Rx Tx
BTS X
Rx
BTS Y
Tx
A branch may have multiple BTS sites on it. A branch may be closed, in which case there would be redundant signalling links on different E1 or T1 circuits. In a closed loop, which requires redundant signalling links for each BTS site, with an open branch, the E1 or T1 circuit to the branch needs to carry redundant signalling links.
1-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
Aggregate Abis
This is an option designed to allow greater flexibility when network planning. It can also help reduce leasing costs of E1/T1 links by optimizing the link usage over the greatest distance between a BSC and BTS. This is achieved by the introduction of third party multiplexer equipment enabled by Motorola software. This equipment allows timeslots on one E1/T1 link to be multiplexed to more than one BTS. Therefore if the situation arises where several single carrier BTSs would each require their own dedicated E1/T1 link, greatly under utilizing each link capacity. Now providing the geographical locations of the sites and distances of the E1/T1 links work out advantageously, it is possible to send all the traffic channels for every site initially over one E1/T1 link to the third party multiplexer and then distribute them over much shorter distances to the required sites. Providing the distance between the BSC and the multiplexer site is sufficiently large this should result in significant leasing cost savings over the original configuration. Below are two diagrams illustrating the before and after scenarios.
BSC
5x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS USED 26x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS UNUSED 5x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS USED 26x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS UNUSED
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL 5x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS USED 26x64 kbit/s TIMESLOTS UNUSED
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-59
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
BSC
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL
E1/T1 Multiplexer
BTS
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL
BTS
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL
Another advantage of introducing the multiplexer is the improvement in the timeslot mapping onto the Abis interface. Currently they are allocated from timeslot 1 upwards for RSLs and timeslot 31 downwards for the RTF traffic channels. Most link providers lease timeslots in contiguous blocks (that is, no gaps between timeslots). Under the existing timeslot allocation scheme it often means leasing a whole E1/T1 link for a few timeslots. There is a new algorithm for allocating timeslots on the Abis interface. This is only used on the links connected directly to the new aggregate service, on the other links the existing algorithm for allocating timeslots is used. Under the new software the timeslots are allocated from timeslot 1 upwards, The RSLs allocated first and the RTF timeslots next with each site being equipped consecutively, thus allowing contiguous blocks of timeslots to be leased. It is important that the sites are equipped in the order that they will be presented, also that the RSLs are equipped first on a per site basis to coincide with the default timeslots for the software downloads to the BTSs. is an example of timeslot allocation in a network using an aggregate service, with links to the aggregate service and links by-passing it.
1-60
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
NEW ALGORITHM 1 2 3 4 5 RSL1 RTF1 RTF1 RTF2 RTF2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RSL2 RTF3 RTF3 RTF4 RTF4 RSL3 RTF5 RTF5 RTF6 RTF6 16 17 18 19 20 RSL4 RTF7 RTF7 RTF8 RTF8
BSC
ALLOCATION UNAFFECTED
ALLOCATION AFFECTED NEW ALGORITHM 1 2 3 4 5 E1/T1 MULTIPLEXER ALLOCATION AFFECTED RSL3 RTF5 RTF5 RTF6 RTF6 6 7 8 9 10 RSL4 RTF7 RTF7 RTF8 RTF8
ALLOCATION AFFECTED
BTS 1
TWO CARRIER ONE RSL 1 2 3 4 5 RSL1 RTF1 RTF1 RTF2 RTF2
BTS 3
ORIGINAL ALGORITHM
NEW ALGORITHM
1 31 30 29 28
ALLOCATION UNAFFECTED
BTS 2
BTS 4
Similar problems can be encountered when equipping redundant RSL devices onto paths containing aggregate services. Because of the new way of allocating timeslots when connecting to a aggregate service from timeslot 1 upwards there is no way of reserving the default download RSL timeslot. This gives rise to the situation where the default RSL timeslot has already been allocated to another device, RTF for example. To avoid this happening the primary and redundant RSLs can be equipped first (in an order that results in the correct allocation of default RSL timeslots), or reserve the default download RSL timeslot so that it may be allocated correctly when the primary or redundant RSL is equipped. If it is envisaged to expand the site in future to preserve blocks of contiguous timeslots on the links, it is possible to reserve the timeslots needed for the expansion so that they can be made free in the future.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-61
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
Alarm reporting This feature has an impact on the alarm reporting for the E1/T1 links. If the link is connected to a third party switching network and is taken out of service, the BTS will report the local alarm, but the remote alarm will only go to the third party aggregate service supporting the E1/T1 link. There may also be a case where the internal links within the E1/T1 switching network fail, causing the RSL to go out of service with no link alarms generated by GSM network entities (BTS, BSC). In these cases it is the responsibility of the third party aggregate service provider to inform the users of the link outage. The only indication of failure is the RSL state change to out of service. The figure below shows a possible network configuration using several switching networks.
BSC
E1/T1 Multiplexer
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
E1/T1 Multiplexer
E1/T1 Multiplexer
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
Restrictions/limitations The ability to nail path timeslots along a link containing an E1/T1 switching network is supported. The user is still able to reserve, nail and free timeslots. The maximum number of sites within a path is ten, for E1/T1 networks. Even though it is a pseudo site, the aggregate service is counted as a site in the path. Hence the number of BTSs that can be present in a path is reduce from ten to nine. GCLK synchronization functions, but any BTS sites connected downlink from a switching network will synchronize to it and not the uplink GSM network entity (BTS, BSC).
1-62
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
The customer has to weigh up the cost saving advantages of the alternative configuration against the reduced capacity in the event of failure of a RTF path.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-63
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
1-64
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
BSC
RTF1 EQUIPPED ON PATH 1 (2 TIMESLOTS) RTF1 EQUIPPED ON PATH 2 (2 TIMESLOTS)
BTS 3
BTS 1
BTS 2
BSC
RTF2 EQUIPPED ON PATH 1 (2 TIMESLOTS) RTF1 EQUIPPED ON PATH 2 (2 TIMESLOTS)
BTS 3
BTS 1
BTS 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-65
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
16 kbit/s RSL
The purpose of the 16 kbit/s RSL is to reduce the transmission costs between the BSC and BTS (Abis interface) for single carrier sites in particular. Prior to the introduction of the 16 kbit/s RSL (at GSR3), a single carrier BTS required three E1/T1 64 kbit/s timeslots; one for the 64 kbit/s RSL and two for the 16 kbit/s traffic channels. The two 64 kbit/s timeslots dedicated to the traffic channels can accommodate eight traffic channels normally. In the case of a single carrier site; it is not possible to use all eight traffic channels of the two 64 kbit/s timeslots the reason is that, in the case of a single carrier site, the carrier will be the BCCH carrier and the air interface timeslot zero of the BCCH carrier is reserved for BCCH information. This information is generated at the BTS not the BSC. The TSW at the BTS routes the traffic channels from the two specified timeslots on the Abis interface to the dedicated radio for transmission. Due to this the traffic channel on the Abis interface corresponding to the timeslot zero on the air interface is unused and available to bear signalling traffic. This results in one 16 kbit/s sub-channel unused on the Abis interface, a waste of resources. With the introduction of the 16 kbit/s RSL it is possible to place it on this unused sub-channel because the RSL is not transmitting on the air interface. The advantage is that it frees up one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis interface reducing the requirement to serve a single carrier system to only two 64 kbit/s timeslots. This operates with M-Cell BTSs and Incell BTSs using KSW switching. In a similar manner, when the single carrier is AMR half rate capable and 16 kbit/s backhaul is used (8 kbit/s switching is unavailable or the 7.95 codec rate is included in the half rate active codec set for that cell), this feature reduces the number of required E1 64 kbit/s timeslots from five to four. (This is not shown in the table and figures.) The two figures, Fully equipped RTF and Sub-equipped RTF show the eight types of RTF which are possible using the above options. They are shown in the table below. Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Options A fully equipped BCCH RTF with an associated 16 kbit/s RSL. A fully equipped BCCH RTF with 64 kbit/s RSL. A fully equipped non-BCCH RTF with an associated 16 kbit/s RSL. A fully equipped non-BCCH RTF with 64 kbit/s RSL. A sub-equipped BCCH RTF with an associated 16 kbit/s RSL. A sub-equipped BCCH RTF with 64 kbit/s RSL. A sub-equipped non-BCCH RTF with an associated 16 kbit/s RSL. A sub-equipped non-BCCH RTF with 64 kbit/s RSL.
1-66
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
KEY
FULLY EQUIPPED RTF
16 kbit/s sub-channel unavailable for use. 16 kbit/s sub-channel used for 16 kbit/s RSL. 16 kbit/s sub-channel available for voice traffic.
BCCH
NON-BCCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-67
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
Sub-equipped RTF
KEY
SUB-EQUIPPED RTF
16 kbit/s sub-channel used for 16 kbit/s RSL. 16 kbit/s sub-channel available for voice traffic.
BCCH
NON-BCCH
Planning constraints The following RSL planning constraints apply: A BTS shall support either 16 kbit/s RSLs or 64 kbit/s RSLs, not both. A BSC shall support both 16 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s RSLs. A BSU based BTS shall support up to eight 16 kbit/s RSLs. Up to six 16 kbit/s RSLs are supported by HorizonIImacro and Horizonmacro. Up to two 16 kbit/s RSLs shall be supported by Horizonmicro2/Horizoncompact2. The BTS and BSC shall support a mix of both fully equipped and sub-equipped RTFs. A ROM download will be carried out over a 64 kbit/s RSL, even at a site designated a 16 kbit/s RSL. A CSFP download shall utilize a 16 kbit/s RSL at a 16 kbit/s designated site. The 16 kbit/s RSL shall only be able to be configured on CCITT sub-channel three of a 64 kbit/s E1/T1 timeslot for BSU based sites. An associated 16 kbit/s RSL shall be supported on redundant RTF paths where one exists on the primary path.
1-68
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
16 kbit/s XBL
The 16 kbit/s XBL has been introduced to provide a lower cost solution to the customer by reducing the interconnect costs between an RXCDR and BSC. This is achieved by reducing the XBL data rate from its current 64 kbit/s to 16 kbit/s. This frees three 16 kbit/s sub-channels on the E1/T1 64 kbit/s timeslot to enable them to be used as TCHs. The maximum number of XBLs able to be configured between a single BSC and RXCDR remains the same as before, at two, with a total number of XBLs to an RXCDR of 20. There is no restriction on which timeslot an XBL can be configured. It will be possible to select a rate of 16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s on an XBL basis, so it would be possible to have two different rates at the same BSC to RXCDR, although this would not be considered a typical configuration. As a result of the introduction of the 16 kbit/s RSL there will be no reduction in processing capacity of the BSC or RXCDR.
Figure 1-1
BSC
XBL
XBL
BSC
XBL
XBL
BSC
XBL
XBL
RXCDR
BSC
XBL
XBL
BSC
XBL
XBL
Maximum of two XBLs between the BSC and XCDR of either 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s on the E1/T1 link. Maximum of ten XBLs per RXCDR.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-69
Version 1 Rev 3
Network topology
This is an operator selectable mode which refers to a BSC and/or RXCDR in which Ater channels and CICs are statically switch connected. This mode does not provide any fault tolerance and CIC validations, and is intended only to provide an upgrade path. Once both BSC and RXCDR are upgraded, the use of auto-connect mode is recommended. NOTE When upgrading the network and the BSC is being upgraded before the RXCDR, backwards compatibility mode must be used for the corresponding AXCDR.
Prior to introduction of this feature, all Ater channels were statically assigned and use of XBL links was not mandatory. From release GSR5, should an operator decide to use the auto-connect, it becomes imperative to equip XBL links on the RXCDR and BSC. If no XBLs are equipped, and the AXCDR is operating in the auto-connect mode, all CICs would at the BSC associated with that AXCDR will be blocked and no call traffic will go to that AXCDR.
1-70
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network topology
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-71
Version 1 Rev 3
1-72
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
New hardware
New hardware has been developed to support the AMR and the GSM half rate features. This equipment, in conjunction with the supporting software and firmware, provides the capabilities necessary to fully exploit the advantages of AMR and/or GSM half rate. This equipment consists of the following: Double Kiloport Switch (DSW2). Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX). Generic DSP Processing board 2 (GDP2). Remote Transcoder Unit 3 (shelf) (RXU3). Base Station System Cabinet 3 (BSSC3). AMR and GSM half rate may be used without the benefit of any of the new hardware, although not as efficiently (this is discussed later in this chapter). NOTE Without new hardware, AMR requires the use of GDPs configured as EGDP(s). GDP2 will not support GSM HR on the 7.x load line. This added capability will be part of GSR 8.
There are many factors to be taken into account when configuring/operating a system in which AMR and/or GSM half rate is present. These include: AMR-capable handset penetration (see the first note below). GSM half ratecapable handset penetration (see the second note below). Transceiver capability. Carrier configuration. Use of reserved channels / cell congestion. NOTE NOTE It is assumed that an AMR-capable handset or mobile includes both fr and hr capability. It is expected that most handsets or mobiles are GSM half rate capable.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-73
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning
The system operator must decide how the system should operate with regard to full and half rate, and what combination of new and old equipment is to be utilized. Other decisions, such as codec rates and backhaul, must also be made. One of the main decisions to be made is how to utilize the half rate capability of AMR and/or GSM half rate. This chapter includes information which describes the benefits of the AMR codecs and how AMR Full Rate and AMR Half Rate compare to the existing GSM codecs. The GSM Half Rate codec is compared to the other GSM codecs. Also discussed are the benefits in coverage of AMR Full Rate. The capacity increases made possible through the use of half rate are discussed, with examples showing the potential gains under a variety of configurations and (half rate) capable handset penetration. Information can be used to help determine how AMR full rate and AMR/GSM half rate should be utilized. As stated earlier, there are three primary methods of AMR usage, two of which apply to GSM half rate: 1. AMR full rate only (AMR only). This has the advantage of providing better voice quality under a broad range of channel conditions. This method is robust but provides no capacity advantage per carrier. It may be particularly suited to areas where adverse propagation conditions prevail, for example. Forced half rate. This is used when capacity is paramount. Voice quality is sacrificed in order to carry more calls per carrier. It may be a candidate for use in severely congested areas, or where voice quality is not a concern. A mix of full rate and half rate. Full rate is generally used until the cell becomes congested, at which time half rate is employed. This configuration will provide quality voice coverage until congestion is reached. This capacity on demand configuration is well suited for environments with varying traffic patterns, such as cities. The information contained in "Half rate utilization" on page 4-25 can be used to help configure the system to maximum effectiveness when half rate is used in such a manner.
2.
3.
1-74
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-75
Version 1 Rev 3
1-76
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
5.0
MOS
4.0
3.0
2.0
Conditions No Errors 4.01 4.06 4.01 C/I=16 dB C/I=13 dB 4.01 4.06 4.01 4.13 4.01 4.08 3.65 3.96 3.05 C/I=10 dB C/I= 7 dB C/I= 4 dB 3.65 3.59 1.53 2.66 C/I= 1 dB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-77
Version 1 Rev 3
1-78
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
5.0
MOS
4.0
3.0 Sel. Requirements 2.0 AMR-HR EFR FR HR No Errors 3.99 4.11 4.21 3.50 3.35
C/I=19 dB C/I=16 dB C/I=13 dB C/I=10 dB C/I= 7 dB 3.99 4.04 3.99 3.96 3.72 4.21 3.50 3.14 3.38 3.74 3.14 3.24 2.74 3.10 3.34 2.74 2.80
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-79
Version 1 Rev 3
Conclusions
HR speech quality is better than GSM FR and HR, but not as good as EFR. If one considers a MOS score of 3.0 to be the minimally accepted "communications quality" level, then at lower C/I levels (7 dB and 4 dB) the AMR HR speech coder quality is poor. AMR hr, of course, provides the capacity benefit of allowing two calls to exist in the space of one timeslot. This behaviour suggests that one viable deployment strategy is to use fr mode until capacity limitations force calls to utilize hr mode, at which time some fr calls can also be moved to hr. A hr call may also be moved to a fr channel via an interference based handover, depending on the congestion state of the cell and system parameter settings. The Motorola system supports this configuration, as well as many others, including forcing all calls to use hr all the time, equipment permitting. Selection of a particular mode of operation is up to the operator. MOS scores are subjective and may vary depending upon customer expectations.
1-80
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
First digit = # cell sites, second digit = # sectors/cell and third digit = # carriers/cell.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-81
Version 1 Rev 3
1-82
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
0.10
0.20
0.80
0.90
1.00
20.000 15.000 10.000 5.000 0.000 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 AMR Capable MS Penetration
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-83
Version 1 Rev 3
1-84
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
30.000 20.000 10.000 0.000 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 AMR Capable MS Penetration 0.80 0.90 1.00
Carried Erlangs (at ~2% blocking) 80.000 70.000 60.000 50.000 40.000 30.000 20.000 10.000 0.000 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 AMR Capable MS Penetration 0.80 0.90 1.00
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-85
Version 1 Rev 3
Conclusions
Figure 1-29 and Figure 1-30are useful in illustrating that, for some deployment strategies such as a maximum capacity configuration, more carrier equipment should be configured as hr-capable when hr-capable handset penetration rises. For example, in a 5 carrier cell with a 50% handset penetration rate, there is not much difference in erlang capacity between a 3 hr-capable carrier configuration and a 5 (all) hr-capable carrier configuration. As the handset penetration rises however, the 5 hr-capable carrier configuration is better able to utilize the extra capacity that hr offers. As noted earlier, GSM hr-capable handset penetration is expected to be very high. When migrating a system to one that includes half rate, take care to ensure that the call capacity rating of the various components of the system are not exceeded. Use of hr improves the spectral efficiency over the air interface (and potentially the backhaul), but from a load perspective, a half rate call has the same impact as a full rate call. Other strategies, such as utilizing hr only during periods of high demand, would require fewer hr-capable carriers.Figure 1-29 and Figure 1-30 demonstrate how even adding one hr-capable carrier can increase erlang capacity.
Timeslot usage
This section briefly describes timeslot configuration and the algorithm used to optimise usage. A GSM carrier consists of 8 timeslots, some or all of which may be used for voice traffic. In full rate, each voice call occupies one timeslot. In half rate, the timeslot is split into two sub-channels, each of which is capable of supporting one hr call. A fr call cannot be carried within two sub-channels split across two timeslots. At any instance, depending on configuration, a carrier may contain a combination of fr and hr calls. To optimise capacity, it is desirable to not have fragmented hr usage. That is, it is best to use both sub-channels of a single timeslot rather than one sub-channel on two timeslots. This frees up contiguous sub-channels for use in a fr call. The Motorola algorithm will attempt first to assign new calls to timeslots that have one sub-channel in use before using a timeslot with both sub-channels idle. This provides a large degree of concentration. As calls begin and end, some degree of fragmenting is unavoidable and the algorithm will attempt to fill in the holes as new calls arrive. This applies to all arriving calls (e.g. originations, handovers, etc.). It was also considered whether to further pack hr calls together via intra-cell handover whenever fragmenting reaches a level where a fr call might be blocked. Simulations have been carried out under a variety of configurations and conditions, and it was determined that the slight capacity gain was outweighed by the negative aspects of performing the otherwise unnecessary handover. Although the results varied according to penetration rate and configuration, in general, additional blocking of 1.5% or less resulted for the fr only handsets (as compared with the hr-capable handsets). Limiting the number of hr capable carriers in a cell can reduce this disparity.
Rate adaptation
Rate Adaptation (RA) is particular to AMR and refers to the control and selection of the codec mode based upon channel quality. Another name for it is Codec Mode Adaptation. The term Codec Mode" refers to one of the various choices of bit partitioning between the speech and error protection bits.
1-86
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Codec modes
A total of 14 codec modes are defined for AMR; 8 for the fr channel mode, and 6 for the hr channel mode. Up to 4 codec modes may be utilized for any given voice call. This is called the Active Codec Set (ACS). The uplink and downlink directions may each use a different codec mode; hence there are 2 sets of associated thresholds and hysteresis, one for uplink and one for downlink. The ACS may be chosen from the supported codec modes. An analysis has been carried out to determine what common set of codec modes should be supported across all the CCU platforms (not all platforms could support all of the codec modes). The conditions were a 900 MHz, ideal frequency hopped system with a co-channel interferer and a typical urban multipath channel model. The speech is at a nominal input level and is not degraded by background noise. The result is the selection of 5 fr and 5 hr codec modes, as shown in Table 1-6. The shaded areas indicate the codec modes that are not supported. Speech codec bit rate (fr) 12.2kb/s 10.2kb/s 7.95kb/s 7.4kb/s 6.7kb/s 5.9kb/s 5.15kb/s 4.75kb/s NOTE Supported ? Y Y N Y Y N Y N Speech Codec bit rate (hr) N/A N/A 7.95kb/s 7.4kb/s 6.7kb/s 5.9kb/s 5.15kb/s 4.75kb/s Supported? N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y N
These values were obtained from simulation and may not be suitable for all conditions.
The analysis provided the following defaults for the ACS: Full Rate: 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, and 5.15 kbit/s. Half Rate: 7.4 kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, and 5.15 kbit/s. If 16 kbit/s backhaul is used for the BTS-BSC interface (i.e. 4 x 64 kbit/s timeslots per hr carrier) then the 7.95 kbit/s codec mode should be added to the hr ACS. An initial codec mode is also required. The same analysis provided the following default values: FR initial codec mode: 10.2 kbit/s. HR initial codec mode: 6.7 kbit/s. The HR initial codec mode remains at 6.7 kbit/s even if the 7.95 codec mode is added to the HR ACS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
1-87
Version 1 Rev 3
1-88
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Horizonmacro Theory
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 2
Horizonmacro Theory
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-1
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizonmacro Theory
2-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the generic functions of a Base Transceiver Station (BTS). Identify and state the purpose of the Horizonmacro. Describe the functions and simplified operation of the Horizonmacro. Identify and describe the simplified operation of the Horizonmacro RF modules.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-3
Version 1 Rev 3
2-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-5
Version 1 Rev 3
2-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-7
Version 1 Rev 3
2-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-9
Version 1 Rev 3
2-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
RF MODULES
THREE Tx BLOCKS (DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) SIX TRANSCEIVERS (CTUs)
T43/BIB
DIGITAL MODULES
ALARM BOARD TWO 2-FANS. MCUF FMUX/NIU/BPSM
CABINET STRUCTURE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-11
Version 1 Rev 3
2-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-13
Version 1 Rev 3
2-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Two stacked Horizonmacro indoor cabinets with front covers attached to the two stacking brackets
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-15
Version 1 Rev 3
There are several manufacturers of the PSMs. Each is fully compatible with the same type of PSM of a different manufacturer.
2-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-17
Version 1 Rev 3
All four NIUs operate from the master MCUF, but each pair of NIUs depend on a BPSM for power. All NIUs configure to the master MCUF clock. NOTE When fitting a replacement redundant MCUF, care must be taken to ensure firmware compatibility with the master MCUF. Firmware incompatibility may result in a loss of communication between the two MCUFs so that the redundant MCUF is not in a position to take control in the event of a failure of the master MCUF.
2-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
REDUNDANT (B)
MCUF B
FMUX
NIU B0
NIU B1
BPSM
ALARM MODULE
MASTER (A)
MCUF A
FMUX
NIU A0
NIU A1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-19
Version 1 Rev 3
2-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
E1/T1
E1/T1
NIUA0
NIUA1
NIUB0
NIUB1 TO EXTENSION CABINET FOR SIX TRANSCEIVERS TO EXTENSION CABINET FOR SIX TRANSCEIVERS 2 2 2
FMUX
MCUF
2 FMUX 2
FMUX
2 2 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-21
Version 1 Rev 3
2-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
NIU functionality
The NIU provides two E1/T1 interfaces into the network (link 0 and link 1) as well as LAPD encoding/decoding and clock recovery from a selected E1/T1 link. The second E1/T1 interface (link 1) is not used for NIUs placed in BCU positions at NIU A1 and NIU B1. An NIU control processor provides network interface configuration and supervision, controlled by the MCUF. The NIU control processor maintains two independent control links in the redundant configuration (one to each MCUF), each using timeslot 0 of MCUF link 0.
NIU locations
The cabinet may contain up to four NIU modules in the BCU. Two NIUs are located in the master (lower) part of the cage. Two NIUs are in the redundant (upper) part of the cage, though these upper NIUs are also used for non-redundant purposes. An NIU in slot A0 of the BCU supports two E1/T1 links. An NIU in slot A1 of the BCU supports one E1/T1 link. An NIU in slot B0 of the BCU supports two E1/T1 links. An NIU in slot B1 of the BCU supports one E1/T1 link.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-23
Version 1 Rev 3
2-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER FMUX IN ANOTHER CABINET AT THE SITE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Alarm module
Alarm module
Alarm module overview
The alarm module provides equipment with an external alarm system to report operational status. The alarm module: Collects all cabinet alarms (received from the backplane). Provides current sensing for 16 customer inputs, referred to as site alarms. These inputs are provided by the PIX connectors PIX0 and PIX1. Controls up to four relay driven outputs linked to customer equipment. (Changeover contacts 30 V 1 A maximum). These outputs are provided by the PIX0 connector. Transmits alarm information to all CTUs in the same cabinet. Provides power, signal conditioning and multiplexing for GPS signals (8 V to 36 V dc). The alarm module is located in the BCU adjacent to the MCUFs. The alarm module is designed to ensure correct location.
2-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Alarm module
Version 1 Rev 3
Backplane connector
5 LED pairs
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-27
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizonmacro RF Modules
Horizonmacro RF Modules
RF overview
The RF equipment provides a transmit and receive path between the mobile station and the cabinet transceiver. RF modules described The following equipment is described: Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU). Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (SURF) module (for receive path). Several types of transmit block (Tx block). Tx blocks are used for various configurations of transmit path, depending on number of antennas, CTUs and functionality, including potential shared receive path. Cavity Combining Block CCB, used to combine three CTU transmit paths in conditions where Synthesizer Frequency Hopping (SFH) is not required. Two CCBs can combine up to six CTU transmit paths on to a single Tx antenna. RF general information and loopback test function The following additional information is presented in this chapter: General definition of transmit and receive functions in this RF equipment detail section. An RF overview and RF test function description in the next section. An explanation of frequency hopping in a section immediately after the CTU section. These descriptions are intended to assist the reader in understanding the information on the RF modules.
2-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Horizonmacro RF Modules
Version 1 Rev 3
Receive RF hardware
Receiver RF hardware consists of the SURF module and optional Tx block receive path, and the receive section of the CTU. The SURF module provides bandpass filtering and low-noise amplification for up to three sectors, with diversity receive antenna signals, together with switching to CTUs. CTU Rx role The CTU provides the following receive functions: Receiver tuning (on a timeslot basis) to any receive channel frequency. Demodulation and equalization of the receive channel signal. Measurement of the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) and signal quality. Recovery of received data from the demodulated radio channel. Channel decoding of the received data and processing of the recovered signal. Traffic data is passed on to the MCUF for routing to the MSC. Digital interface to the SURF module, which controls selection by the SURF switch of the receive signals from the appropriate antenna. Comparison and processing of an additional receive path from a second antenna input to support diversity.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-29
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizonmacro RF Modules
2-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizonmacro RF Modules
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-31
Version 1 Rev 3
2-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU) with main features identified
Test interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-33
Version 1 Rev 3
2-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Six N-type receive antenna connections DLNB equivalent) Extension ports to other cabinets
RX1800 0A
RX 90 00 B RX 180 00 A
B 00 B 180 02 RX 1B 0 9 0 RX 90 RX
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-35
Version 1 Rev 3
2-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
RF loopback splitter Filter and amplifier 2 1800 Filter and amplifier 1 1800 Filter and amplifier 0 1800
D C p o w e r
SURF harness
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-37
Version 1 Rev 3
2-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Ant DB
Ant 2
BR 2 BR 1 BR 2 SURF
RF loopback splitter
Switch
Rx1 Rx2 Rx1Rx2 Rx1Rx2 Rx1Rx2 Rx1Rx2 Rx1Rx2
Loopback Control
RF loopback combiner
SURF harness
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-39
Version 1 Rev 3
900 (or 1800) TDF "The Twin Duplexed Filter (TDF)" on page 2-48= Twin duplexed filter. Dual band TDF = Dual band twin duplexed filter. 900 (or 1800) DCF"The Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter (DCF)" on page 2-56 = Duplexed combining bandpass filter. 900 (or 1800) DDF"The Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter (DDF)" on page 2-60 = Dual-stage duplexed combining filter. These Tx blocks are cooled by airflow underneath; the DDF has fins. the TDF, dual band TDF and DCF do not have fins. Three types of plate can be located in the basket, one as blanking plate and two to interface CTU Tx cables: Blanking plate"Blanking plate" on page 2-42. This ensures proper air flow and EMI shielding for an unused basket Tx Block location. Feedthrough plate. This converts two SMA connectors to two N-type connectors, used for connecting Tx cables to CCBs or DDFs. Hybrid Combining Unit (HCU). This combines two SMA connectors to one N-type, enabling two additional CTUs to be connected to a DDF. One type of Tx unit is installed in the stacking bracket, and is connected to three CTUs: Cavity Combining Block (CCB)"The Cavity Combining Block (CCB)" on page 2-64 Two CCBs are required for the six CTUs of a filled cabinet. The CCB has no duplexing capability and, if a single Rx/Tx antenna is used, connection must be via an external high power duplexer.
2-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the top panel and basket which holds the Tx blocks
BASKET TO HOLD THREE Tx BLOCKS HOLE FOR ONE Tx BLOCK CTU CONNECTIONS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-41
Version 1 Rev 3
Blanking plate
Blanking plate
Purpose of blanking plate
The blanking plate is fitted in locations where a Tx block is not required. The blanking plate ensures correct air flow through the cabinet. The plate is attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4 screws.
2-42
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Blanking plate
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-43
Version 1 Rev 3
Blanking plate
2-44
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Blanking plate
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-45
Version 1 Rev 3
HCU connectors
Each HCU connects to: The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. A Tx input of a DDF, using an N-type connector. NOTE All unused SMA inputs to HCU modules must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
2-46
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the Hybrid Combining Unit (HCU) plate with connectors identified
HCU
3 dB TYPICAL LOSS ACROSS COMBINER LOAD
Tx
SMA CONNECTORS
Tx
FIRST CTU
SECOND CTU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-47
Version 1 Rev 3
TDF connectors
Each TDF connects to: The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. The two connectors are underneath the TDF. Two antennas, each for both Rx and Tx, using 7/16 connectors. These connectors are on top of the TDF. The SURF, using two N-type connectors. These connectors are on top of the TDF.
2-48
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the Twin Duplexed Filter (TDF) Tx block with connectors identified
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-49
Version 1 Rev 3
2-50
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Rx TO SURF
Rx TO SURF
Rx FROM ANTENNA
7/16 CONNECTOR
TDF
Rx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx BANDPASS FILTER
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Tx
SMA CONNECTORS
Tx SECOND CTU
FIRST CTU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-51
Version 1 Rev 3
2-52
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-53
Version 1 Rev 3
2-54
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Rx TO 900 SURF
Rx TO 1800 SURF
7/16 CONNECTOR
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Tx
SMA CONNECTORS
Tx 1800 CTU
900 CTU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-55
Version 1 Rev 3
DCF overview
The purpose of the Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter (DCF) Tx block is to enable each antenna to serve two CTUs for both Tx and Rx. The DCF combines two Tx inputs, dissipating half the power within an internal load. The signal then passes through a bandpass filter and out to the antenna. A receive bandpass filter passes only the Rx signal to the SURF module. The DCF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the top surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.
2-56
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter (DCF) with connectors identified
HOLE FOR TOP PANEL BASKET ATTACHMENT N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO SURF 7/16 CONNECTOR TO ANTENNA
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-57
Version 1 Rev 3
2-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Rx TO SURF
7/16 CONNECTOR
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
DCF
LOAD
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-59
Version 1 Rev 3
DDF connectors
Each DDF connects to: The Tx outputs of three or four CTUs, using: Two SMA connectors underneath the DDF. An N-type connector on top of the DDF for connection to a feedthrough plate (for a third CTU) or HCU plate (for combined third/fourth CTUs). A single antenna for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This connector is on top of the DDF. The SURF, using an N-type connector. This connector is on top of the DDF. NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DDF modules must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
2-60
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of the Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter (DDF) Tx block wth connectors identified
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO SURF N-TYPE CONNECTOR FROM CTU BY FEEDTHROU GH PLATE OR HCU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-61
Version 1 Rev 3
2-62
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Tx
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
7/16 CONNECTOR
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
LOAD
LOAD
DDF
Tx SMA CONNECTORS FIRST CTU SECOND CTU Tx
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-63
Version 1 Rev 3
2-64
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
EXTENSION CCB OUTPUT TO MASTER CCB SHORT CIRCUIT STUB EXTENSION CCB WITHOUT BPF
3 Tx INPUTS CCB CONTROL BOARD (REDUNDANT) PHASING LEAD 3 Tx INPUTS CCB CONTROL BOARD (MASTER)
CCB OUTPUT TO BPF BPF INPUT FROM CCB MASTER CCB WITH BPF POWER LEAD TO BOTH CCB CONTROL BOARDS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-65
Version 1 Rev 3
2-66
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-67
Version 1 Rev 3
CCB configuration
The master CCB has a second output to enable the extension CCB to be connected. The bandpass filter can then serve both CCBs in parallel. Any unused output is terminated with a short circuit stub. The two configurations are shown the diagram below.
TO ANTENNA SHORT CIRCUIT STUB MASTER CCB UP TO 3 RF INPUTS TO ANTENNA BANDPASS FILTER
BANDPASS FILTER
UP TO 6 RF INPUTS
2-68
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
REDUNDANT CCB CONTROL BOARD (TCB) ON OTHER CCB INPUT FROM EXTENSION CCB (IF REQUIRED) OR SHORT CIRCUIT STUB
ANTENNA
BIAS TEE
BIAS TEE
POWER CONNECTOR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2-69
Version 1 Rev 3
2-70
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-1
Version 1 Rev 3
3-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Identify and state the purpose of the Horizon IImacro. Describe the functions and simplified operation of the Horizon IImacro. Identify and describe the simplified operation of the Horizon IImacro RF modules.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Equipment Introduction
Equipment Introduction
Overview ofHorizon II macro
The Horizon IImacro is a 12 carrier base transceiver station (BTS) cabinet, with variants that operate in the GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands. The BTS cabinets are designed for indoor use. They can operate from either -48/60 V dc (positive earth), +27 V dc (negative earth), or wide input, nominal 120/240 V, ac single phase supplies. Cabinet cooling is provided by circulation fans located in the bottom of the cabinet. In addition, each power supply contains an integral cooling fan. Figure 41 shows an external view of a standard Horizon IImacro cabinet.
3-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Equipment Introduction
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-5
Version 1 Rev 3
3-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-7
Version 1 Rev 3
3-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
UP TO FOUR PSUs
ALARM MODULE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-9
Version 1 Rev 3
3-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
EXP
0A Rx0
0B
1A
1B Rx1
2A Rx2
SURF2
UP TO 6 Tx BLOCKS
Rx A
Rx B Tx
TO ALARM MODULE
RF MODULES
2 TO XMUX/FMUX OF DIGITAL EXPANSION CABINET MODULES 2 TO XMUX/FMUX OF EXPANSION CABINET 2 TO XMUX/FMUX OF EXPANSION CABINET
XMUX
TO NETWORK
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Figure 45 shows an illustration of a mixed three cabinet site, with a Horizon IImacro BTS as the controller (master).
3-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizon II macro BTS HII SC (contains integrated XMUX) Site Expansion Board 6 CTU2s (12 Carriers) 2
6 CTUs (6 Carriers)
NOTE In this example, the CTU2s in the Horizon II macro BTS are double density, and are therefore capable of handling 2 carriers each (12 carriers total). The maximum site capacity is 24 carriers across all expansion cabinets in the site.
6 TCUs/TCU-Bs (6 Carriers)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-13
Version 1 Rev 3
3-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-15
Version 1 Rev 3
3-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 CHASSIS
SURF2 HARNESS
CTU2 CONNECTOR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-17
Version 1 Rev 3
3-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-19
Version 1 Rev 3
RF equipment description
RF equipment description
Overview of RF equipment
RF modules described The RF modules used in the Horizon IImacro equipment are: Compact transceiver unit (version 2) (CTU2)."The Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU)" on page 2-32 The CTU2 supports both the EGSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands. Sectorized universal receiver front-end module (version 2) (SURF2)"The Sectorized Universal Receiver Front end (SURF) module" on page 2-34. Two versions of the SURF2 are available for the Horizon IImacro: one operates in the 900 MHz frequency band and the other operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band. 900 MHz and 1800 MHz SURF2s cannot be installed in the same cabinet. Similarly, CTU2s operating at 900 MHz and 1800 MHz cannot be mixed in the same cabinet. Several types of transmit block (Tx block)."Transmit (Tx) blocks overview" on page 2-40 Tx blocks are used for various configurations of transmit path, depending on number of antennas, CTU2s and functionality, including potential shared receive path. NOTE
3-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RF equipment description
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-21
Version 1 Rev 3
The CTU2: Generates the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receive functions. Contains the digital circuits required for 32 timeslots of channel equalization, encoding and decoding, and transceiver control logic. The CTU2 provides the air interface between a BSS and MSs, with the following features: Capability of diversity reception (input from up to four antennas) which improves the quality reception in the presence of multipath fading and interference. Frequency change on a timeslot basis for frequency hopping and equipment sharing. Transmit power control. CTU2 features The CTU2 has the following features: Single or double density mode in a Horizon IImacro cabinet. Single density mode provides single carrier GSM Tx capability. Double density mode provides 2 carrier GSM Tx capability (both carriers must be in the same sector). Single carrier EDGE Tx capability. Backwards compatible with Horizonmacro CTU (but BBH restrictions apply if used in double density mode). Transmit diversity. Two or four branch Rx diversity. (Four branch diversity requires 2 x SURF2 modules and a second SURF2 harness cable to be installed.) Hardware support for AMR (upgrade required for pre-GSR7 software). Location and requirements The CTU2 shelf is located below the basket for the Tx blocks, and takes up the majority of the space in the cabinet. The cabinet can contain up to six CTU2s. At least one CTU2 must be fitted in each cabinet. All CTU2s in the cabinet must operate at the same frequency (either 900 MHz or 1800 MHz).
3-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Alarm reporting
The CTU2 status is displayed by LED indicators on the front panel, as shown in Figure 48, and detailed in Table 42. Major sub-systems, such as synthesizers and RF amplifiers, are monitored with alarm signals as necessary. Table 3-1 CTU2 front panel status indicators LED RADIO STATUS Status Unlit Flashing green Meaning CTU2 is off. Boot code being loaded. (Do not remove power or reset - see CAUTION below.) Normal operational mode. Test mode. Transceiver inhibited. Alarm condition. Flash reprogramming in progress. (Do not remove power or reset see CAUTION below.) Transmitter A is off. Transmitter A is keyed on. Transmitter B is off. Transmitter B is keyed on.
Green Flashing yellow Yellow Red Alternately flashing red and green
CAUTION
Removing power or resetting the cabinet while the boot code is downloading or flash reprogramming is taking place will cause memory corruption. If the boot code is corrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network Resolution Centre requesting the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot code file.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-23
Version 1 Rev 3
3-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
View of a CTU2
Tx OUT CONNECTOR
Rx D Rx A Rx C Rx B
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Front panel legend TRANSMIT OUT TTY INTERFACE TEST INTERFACE VCAT INTERFACE
3-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Tx OUT CONNECTOR
TEST INTERFACE
TTY INTERFACE . VCAT INTERFACE RADIO STATUS LED NOTE The CTU2 does not have a reset button. A reset is acheived using the appproriate CTU2 circuit breaker on the CBC. Tx STATUS A LED Tx STATUS B LED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-27
Version 1 Rev 3
CTU2 Rx Function
The receiver part of the CTU2 can accept two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from each SURF2 module (four Rx signals in total). These two signals are applied to inputs (branch A and branch B) of the CTU2 transceiver board. The transceiver can be configured to provide double density receive capacity or 4 branch Rx diversity. In double density mode, the receiver provides demodulation of a main and diversity path for two RF channels. In 4 branch Rx diversity mode, the receiver provides four independent Rx paths for one RF channel. The input from the SURF2 module is filtered, amplified and down converted to ensure the signal level and frequency range are correct for the next stage.
3-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-29
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 module
SURF2 module
SURF2 module overview
The sectorized universal receiver front end (SURF2) module performs low noise amplification, RF bandpass filtering, and antenna to CTU2 routeing through a switch/splitter matrix. One SURF2 can route any of three Rx antenna inputs to any of six different CTU2s for both a main and diversity path. The SURF2 also provides an expansion path from the antenna 0 input for both main and diversity paths. The SURF2 is single band and two versions are available for use in the Horizon IImacro cabinet: 900 MHz, for EGSM900 systems. 1800 MHz, for DCS1800 systems. One or two SURF2 modules may be installed side by side in a slot at the rear of the cabinet top panel. Two connectors on the underside of each module connect to individual SURF2 harnesses which provide connectivity to up to six CTU2s. Antenna connections are located on the top of the unit. Figure 411 shows a view of the SURF2 module with features identified. NOTE Dual band operation in a single cabinet is not supported. That is, 900 and 1800 MHz SURF2s cannot be mixed in the same cabinet.
3-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SURF2 module
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning Considerations
GSM 900 The follwoing factors should be considered when planning the GSM 900 receive equipment: Horizon II macro BTSs require one 900 MHz SURF2 for each cabinet. Currently, the SURF2 is not dual band and only supports 900/1800 Mhz capability in separate cabinets. A second (optional) 900 MHz SURF2 can be installed to provide 4 branch diversity. Receive antennas can be extended across Horizon IImacro cabinets by using the 900 SURF2 expansion ports to feed a SURF2 in another cabinet. Horizon macro BTSs require one 900 MHz SURF for each cabinet. This has dual band (900/1800 Mhz) capability. Receive antennas can be extended across Horizon macro cabinets by using the 900 SURF expansion ports to feed a SURF in another cabinet. M-Cell 2 and M-Cell 6 BTSs require one DLNB for each sector. Receive antennas can be extended across M-Cell 6 cabinets by using the IADU expansion ports to feed an IADU in another cabinet. DCS 1800 The following factors should be considered when planning the DCS1800 receive equipment: Horizon II macro BTSs require one 1800 MHz SURF2 for each cabinet. Currently, the SURF2 is not dual band and only supports 900/1800 Mhz capability in separate cabinets. A second (optional) 1800 MHz SURF2 can be installed to provide 4 branch diversity. Receive antennas can be extended across Horizon IImacro cabinets by using the 1800 SURF2 expansion ports to feed a SURF2 in another cabinet. Horizon macro BTSs require one 1800 MHz SURF for each cabinet. Receive antennas can be extended across Horizon macro cabinets by using the 1800 SURF expansion ports to feed a SURF in another cabinet. Two types of 1800 SURF are available. One is 1800 MHz single band and the other is 1800/900 MHz dual band. M-Cell 2 and M-Cell 6 BTSs require one LNA for each sector. Receive antennas can be extended across M-Cell 6 cabinets by using the LNA expansion ports to feed a LNA in another cabinet. NOTE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-31
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 module
3-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SURF2 module
Version 1 Rev 3
RX 2B RX 1B RX 0B
EXPANSION PORTS TO OTHER CABINETS EXP B EXP A HANDLE FOR MODULE REMOVAL RX 2A
RX 0A RX 1A
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-33
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 module
Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path except for the digital and dc power section which is shared by the two diversity paths. There are three antenna pair inputs (ANT 0, ANT 1 and ANT 2) for each of the two diversity branches (Branch A and Branch B). There are six outputs to the CTU2 for each of the two diversity branches. There is also an output for an expansion cabinet for ANT 0 on each branch. Digital codes are transmitted from the CTU2s to the digital section. The digital codes are dissimilar in order that CTU2s programmed for the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequency bands can be recognized and appropriate switching can be made to the required antenna for transmission and reception. The digital and power supply section is also responsible for manual overrides, alarms and dc voltages. Alarms The alarm signal from the SURF2 is active low (0 V) and is multiplexed onto the branch 1 (and branch 3) RF connection. An alarm generated at an individual CTU2 is caused by an unexpected number of antenna select pulses being read. An alarm generated at all CTU2s connected to the SURF2 is caused by one of the amplifiers drawing too much or too little current.
3-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SURF2 module
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 Filter and amplifier 2 Filter and amplifier 1 Filter and amplifier 0
SURF2 harness
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-35
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 module
3-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SURF2 module
Version 1 Rev 3
Branch 3
Branch 4
2C
1C
0C EXP EXP 0D C D
1D
2D
SURF2 #2 (optional)
C D
CTU2
Rx D Rx A Rx C Rx B Branch 3 Branch 2
Branch 4
Branch 1
2B
1B
0B EXP EXP 0A B A
1A
2A
SURF2 #1
B Branch 1 (main) Branch 2 (diversity) A
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-37
Version 1 Rev 3
SURF2 module
The physical interface between the SURF and the CTU2 consists of three connections, one bi-directional and two directional. The bi-directional connection is for the RF receive main branch (branch 1) and for digital communication between the SURF and the CTU2. One directional connection is for the RF receive diversity branch (branch 2), and the other is for the loopback or VSWR mode selection and the LPBK / VSWR signal.
3-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SURF2 module
Version 1 Rev 3
Branch 2
Branch 1
2B
1B
0B
2A
1A
0A EXT EXT B A
SURF CTU2
Rx D Rx A Rx C Rx B Branch 1 (main) LPBK / VSWR Branch 2 (diversity) B C A
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-39
Version 1 Rev 3
Tx Blocks Overview
Tx Blocks Overview
Introduction to transmit blocks
Transmit (Tx) blocks are located in up to six positions in the basket above the CTU2s. There are three types of internal Tx blocks: DUP = Duplexer. HCU = Hybrid combiner unit. DHU = Dual hybrid combiner unit. These Tx blocks are cooled by airflow underneath. Two types of plate can be located in the basket, one as a blanking plate and one to interface CTU2 Tx cables: Blanking plate. This ensures proper air flow and EMI shielding for an unused Tx block location in the basket. Feedthrough plate. This converts a single SMA connector to a single N-type connector, used for connecting a Tx cable from a CTU2 to an expansion cabinet. CAUTION Unused Tx block locations must be covered with a blanking plate for correct air flow and EMC shielding.
3-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Tx Blocks Overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-41
Version 1 Rev 3
Blanking plate
Blanking plate
Blanking plate function
The blanking plate is fitted in locations where a Tx block is not required. The blanking plate ensures the correct air flow through the cabinet. The plate is secured to the floor of the top panel basket using three M4 screws. Figure 414 shows a view of a blanking plate. NOTE It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block screw locations have a screw in place and these are tightened to the correct torque (see Torque values. in Chapter 1). This is to ensure maximum quality of EMC and general containment.
3-42
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Blanking plate
Version 1 Rev 3
Blanking Plate
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREWS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-43
Version 1 Rev 3
Feedthrough plate
Feedthrough plate
Feedthrough plate function
The feedthrough plate converts a normal SMA connector from the CTU2 to a N-type connector. The N-type connector is used to connect to a feedthrough plate in an expansion cabinet The plate is secured to the floor of the top panel basket using three M4 screws. Figure 415 shows a view of the top side of a feedthrough plate.
3-44
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Feedthrough plate
Version 1 Rev 3
Feedthrough Plate
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREW
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREWS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-45
Version 1 Rev 3
Duplexer (DUP)
Duplexer (DUP)
DUP function
The purpose of the DUP is to enable each antenna to serve one CTU2 for both Tx and Rx. This is achieved by the use of bandpass filters, contained within the duplexer. The DUP also contains a VSWR monitor that can detect and generate alarms for transmit antennas with a VSWR of 3:1 or worse. The DUP is located in the basket above the CTU2s, and is attached to the top panel using two M6 screws. Figure 416 shows the DUP Tx block with connectors identified.
3-46
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Duplexer (DUP)
Version 1 Rev 3
Duplexer (DUP)
LIFTING HANDLE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SIDE VIEW
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-47
Version 1 Rev 3
Duplexer (DUP)
DUP connectors
Each DUP connects to: The Tx output from a CTU2, using an SMA connector. The connector is underneath the DUP. One antenna, for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This connector is on top of the DUP. The SURF, using one N-type connector. This connector is on top of the DUP.
3-48
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Duplexer (DUP)
Version 1 Rev 3
Rx to SURF2
CTU2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-49
Version 1 Rev 3
3-50
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREW
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREWS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-51
Version 1 Rev 3
HCU connectors
Each HCU connects to: The Tx outputs of two CTU2s, using SMA connectors. The Tx input of a DUP, using a QMA snap-on/snap-off connector. NOTE All unused SMA inputs to HCU modules must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
3-52
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
1st CTU2
2nd CTU2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-53
Version 1 Rev 3
3-54
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREWS
M4 ATTACHMENT SCREW
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-55
Version 1 Rev 3
DHU connectors
The DHU connects to: The Tx outputs of up to three CTU2s, using the SMA connectors underneath the DHU. The Tx input of a DUP, using a QMA snap-on/snap-off connector. NOTE All unused SMA inputs to the DHU must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.
3-56
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
DHU
3 dB typical loss across each combiner stage
CTU2
CTU2
CTU2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-57
Version 1 Rev 3
3-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
ALARM MODULE
NOTE
Site expansion boards are only required when expansion cabinets are used.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-59
Version 1 Rev 3
Redundancy
Redundancy capability for each of the digital modules is described below. HIISC The master cabinet must contain at least one HIISC (master), installed as shown in Figure 422. A second HIISC (slave) may also be installed to provide redundancy. XMUX All expansion cabinets must contain at least one XMUX, installed in the same slot location as the master HIISC in the master cabinet. A second XMUX may also be installed to provide redundancy. XMUX redundancy is coupled to redundancy of the HIISC in the master cabinet; that is, the XMUX is only redundant if the HIISC is also redundant. Site expansion board A site expansion board is only required when expansion cabinets are used. In such cases a site expansion board must be fitted in slot A (see Figure 422) in each cabinet. expansion board redundancy is coupled to HIISC and XMUX redundancy. If the master cabinet has a redundant HIISC and the expansion cabinets have redundant XMUXs, each cabinet (including the master) must also have a redundant site expansion board installed in slot B. Alarm module An alarm module must be installed in each cabinet, master or slave. Alarm module redundancy is not supported.
3-60
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Internal Communication
MASTER BTS
HIISC
INTERNAL XMUX
SLAVE BTS
SITE EXPANSION BOARD XMUX
SLAVE BTS
SITE EXPANSION BOARD XMUX
SLAVE BTS
UP TO 6 TRANSCEIVERS
UP TO 6 TRANSCEIVERS
UP TO 6 TRANSCEIVERS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-61
Version 1 Rev 3
The main features of the HIISC are as follows: Processors for software and NIU functionality. Programmable timeslot interchanger (TSI) that supports the following: TDM links for single (legacy) and double density GSM and single density EDGE. Three expansion links (FMUX equivalent). These links can connect to additional Horizon IImacro cabinets (with double density GSM or single density EDGE transceivers) or legacy Horizonmacro cabinets (with single/double density GSM or single density EDGE transceivers). BBH routeing for GSM/GPRS (single or double density) or EDGE transceivers.
Six integrated E1/T1 span line interfaces. (An upgrade for the CIM/BIM will support eight E1/T1 spans on later equipment.) Programmable synchronization/timimg block for support of multiple air interfaces. A GPS interface is included to support Compact EDGE and other air interfaces that require inter-site synchronization. Figure 424 shows a HIISC module.
3-62
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
BACKPLANE CONNECTORS
CAL PORT NIU ETHERNET PORT STATUS LEDS (RED & GREEN)
RESET BUTTONS (CPU: RESETS CPU FULL: REMOVES SOFTWARE FROM MEMORY) SYNC/NIU TTY PORT
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-63
Version 1 Rev 3
PIX interfaces
The HIISC provides a serial interface for the PIX outputs. These are routed to the cabinet alarm board and enable relay contact control of external customer equipment.
3-64
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-65
Version 1 Rev 3
3-66
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
NIU BLOCK Control via NIU port 0, TS 0 NIU port 0 & port 1 2
HII SC
TSI
24
Control interface Internal 2048 kbit/s TDM interface with 32 timeslots External E1 or T1 interface Internal E1 or T1 interface Frequency reference CTU2s
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-67
Version 1 Rev 3
Line interface module The line interface module consists of passive analogue components and is responsible for physical termination and protection. It provides connections for six span lines. 75 ohm coax and 120 ohm twisted pair are provided for E1 termination. Each provides a 120 ohm interface to the NIU line interface unit (LIU). An alternative unit conforming to ANSI T.403 is available for T1 termination, if required. This is the only physical difference between an E1 and T1 capable site controller cabinet. LIU and framers Dual mode E1/T1 LIU and framers are used, thus permitting the soft selection of either E1 or T1 span line connections. To maintain compatibility with existing GSM BTS and BSC equipment, the line driver is set for 120 ohm termination for E1 mode and > 600 ft (approx. 183 m) for T1 mode. The LIU/framer bridges between the internal 32 timeslot 2048 kbit/s TDM highway and the external E1 2048 kbit/s and T1 1544 kbit/s TDM formats. (For T1 this is achieved using a timeslot-mapping schema.) Timeslot interchanger (TSI) The TSI is controlled by the site control processor (the NIU control processor is not be equipped with a TSI control interface). A 64 kbit/s timeslot switch is responsible (within the context of backhaul and RSL requirements) for switching the following: Timeslots containing TRAU between the CTU2s and NIU framer / LIU. Timeslots containing RSL traffic between the NIU framer / LIU and NIU control processor. Timeslots containing NIU control messages and RSL traffic stripped of LAPD between the NIU control processor and the site control processor. Inserting 16 kbit/s RSL links into a bit-pair of a designated timeslot. The use of the TSI in this fashion allows a RSL to be placed into any timeslot (other than timeslot 0 in E1 systems) on any of the 6 spans. The design provides complete flexibility in the number of timeslots on any span that can be used for RSL traffic. Indeed, all 6 could be placed on a single span. However, each RSL has the limitation that the uplink (BTS to BSC) and downlink (BSC to BTS) timeslot mappings are identical. NIU control processor and RSL termination The NIU control processor terminates the LAPD protocol layer for each RSL. It supports up to 8 separate and simultaneous LAPD connections. Each LAPD connection may be configured as either a 64 kbit/s link or as a 16 kbit/s link. The NIU control processor also configures and monitors the LIU / framer. To facilitate these functions the NIU control processor is provisioned with a control interface to the LIU / framer and a dual 32 timeslot 2048 kbit/s TDM interface to the TSI. The NIU control processor terminates up to 16 full duplex HDLC channels - up to 8 for LAPD transport to the BSC and up to 8 for RSL (including one for control) transport to the site control processor. Site control processor The site control processor is provisioned with a control interface for the TSI and two 2048 kbit/s TDM interfaces to the TSI. It is responsible for configuration of the TSI and control and monitoring of the NIU. NIU control processor to site control processor interface The interface between the NIU control processor and the site control processor consists of NIU control messages plus RSL messages stripped of the LAPD protocol. Each RSL connection to the BSC utilizes a 64 kbit/s timeslot between the NIU control processor and the site control processor.
3-68
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
NOTE
NIU control messages, including those used to establish, reconfigure and disconnect RSL links, are always carried within timeslot 0 on the NIU TDM port 0. These messages are multiplexed with traffic comprising the first established RSL. The site control processor dynamically assigns additional RSL connections to any of the other remaining 31 timeslots of NIU TDM port 0 or 32 timeslots of NIU TDM port 1.
Daisy chains The HIISC supports backhaul daisy chain configurations. Traffic for upstream sites is routed via the TSI, allowing for multiplexing over shared spans with local site traffic. Span type selection The NIU defaults to the E1 interface type for all span lines, but supports a message interface with the site control processor that allows the span type to be changed to T1. E1 framing options The NIU can enable and disable timeslot 0 CRC-4 multi-framing (enaA 64 kbit/s connection is used, regardless of whether the connection to the BSC is operating at 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s.bled by default). Selection is supported by a message interface with the site control processor. In either case, timeslot 16 multi-framing is disabled (allowing timeslot 16 to used for TRAU or RSL traffic) and HDB3 line coding is used. E1 N-bit facility The NIU can enable and disable the use E1 N-bits for alarm indications. Selection is supported by a message interface with the site control processor. T1 framing options The NIU can select either T1 D4 framing with AMI line coding or T1 ESF framing with B8ZS line coding (default). Selection is supported by a message interface with the site control processor. Timing extraction A 2048/1544 kHz frequency reference and a 125 s timing reference is extracted by the framer / LIU from each span. This unit also performs jitter and wander attenuation. Each of the extracted references are fed into a switch that is under site control processor supervision. This is used to select the reference used for phase locking the SYNC function. TRAU Span lines transporting TRAU are switched to the appropriate CTU2 by the TSI.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-69
Version 1 Rev 3
Additionally, the site control processor specifies the following internal connection parameters: NIU port and timeslot for the connection between the NIU control processor and the site control processor. NIU port and timeslot for the connection between the NIU control processor and the TSI. 16 kbit/s RSLs Any or all of the 8 RSL links can be configured at either 16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s. When configured at 16 kbit/s, a RSL occupies a bit-pair within a single timeslot. Four bit-pair positions are supported; bits 0 and 1, bits 2 and 3, bits 4 and 5, bits 6 and 7. For downlink flows, the TSI switches the entire timeslot containing the 16 kbit/s bit-pair onto a NIU port timeslot. The NIU control processor recovers the LAPD from the designated bit-pair. For uplink flows, the NIU control processor places the LAPD within the designated bit-pair and timeslot on its TSI connection. The TSI then inserts this bit-pair into a designated timeslot, while preserving the content of the other six bits within that timeslot. RSL and span alarms LAPD link management events for each LAPD connection and span alarm events for each span are reported to the site control processor by the NIU control processor. Flow control The interface between the NIU control processor and the site control processor supports flow control. This enables the NIU processor to throttle RSL traffic from the site control processor in the event of an overload condition. This condition may occur when 16 kbit/s RSL links are active or when multiple heavily loaded 64 kbit/s RSL links are active. To reduce the possibility of overloading, the processing delay within the NIU control processor is minimized and the RSL message buffer depth is maximized. A fully loaded NIU (up to 8 established RSL links) maintains a maximum processor delay of less than 25 ms per message. Delay is measured from receipt of the end of the incoming frame to the start of transmission of the outgoing frame. The NIU control processor has 2000 kbytes of message buffers.
3-70
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-71
Version 1 Rev 3
XMUX module
XMUX module
Overview of the XMUX module
The expansion multiplexer (XMUX) module replaces the HIISC in expansion cabinets and provides the interface to the master cabinet. Two XMUX modules may be installed in an expansion cabinet, one for the master HIISC, and one for the slave. An expansion cabinet only requires one XMUX to connect to six CTU2s within the cabinet (plus one for redundancy if required). NOTE If Horizon IImacro expansion cabinets are added, the master cabinet and expansion cabinets must also contain optional site expansion boards.
The XMUX can support up to six transceiver links. It uses a 16.384 Mbit/s Manchester encoded serial data link, organized as 256 x 8-bit timeslots in a 125 microsecond frame. Manchester coding is used to detect errors, indicated at timeslot 0 for each transceiver, enabling error correction at the receiving XMUX. NOTE Although the XMUX provides the equivalent functionality of the FMUX in Horizonmacro, it is NOT backwards compatible and cannot be used in a Horizonmacro cabinet.
3-72
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
XMUX module
Version 1 Rev 3
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-73
Version 1 Rev 3
XMUX module
3-74
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
XMUX module
Version 1 Rev 3
CTU2 CTU2 CTU2 CTU2 XMUX CTU2 CTU2 TTL Signals SITE EXPANSION BOARD Tx MASTER BTS Rx Fibre Optic Links TTL Signals SITE EXPANSION BOARD Tx Rx
HII SC
EXPANSION BTS
NOTE
Site expansion is not restricted to using Horizon IImacro cabinets as slaves. Horizonmacro and/or M-Cell 6 (equipped with a FMUX) can also be used. Similarly, the master BTS can be a Horizonmacro or FMUX-equipped M-Cell 6, with a Horizon IImacro as one or more slaves.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-75
Version 1 Rev 3
3-76
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-77
Version 1 Rev 3
Alarm module
Alarm module
Alarm module overview
The alarm module is located on the left side of the digital module shelf. It provides the cabinet equipment with an external alarm monitoring system to report operational status. The alarm module: Collects all cabinet alarms (received from the backplane). Provides current sensing for 16 customer inputs (referred to as site alarms). These inputs are provided by the PIX connectors PIX0 and PIX1. Controls up to four relay driven outputs linked to customer equipment (changeover contacts 30 V 1 A maximum). These outputs are provided by the PIX0 connector. Transmits alarm information to all CTU2s in the same cabinet. Processes antenna VSWR monitor alarm signals. NOTE The alarm module is not backwards compatible with the alarm module used in Horizonmacro.
3-78
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Alarm module
Version 1 Rev 3
Alarm Module
BACKPLANE CONNECTORS
5 LED PAIRS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
3-79
Version 1 Rev 3
Alarm module
3-80
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-1
Version 1 Rev 3
4-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Identify and state the purpose of the Horizonmicro/compact. Describe the functions and simplified operation of the Horizonmicro/compact. Identify and describe the simplified operation of the Horizonmicro/compact Digital and RF modules.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-3
Version 1 Rev 3
4-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-5
Version 1 Rev 3
4-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
RF cable to antenna 1
RF cabling
Horizoncompact BTS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-7
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
BTS enclosure
Overview of BTS enclosure
The Horizonmicro/Horizoncompact is designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided, and once this is in place, the complete Horizoncompact can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizoncompact is provided with a moulded solar cover which, when removed, allows access for maintenance purposes. All input and output cables (for example, ac power, HDSL and E1/T1 lines) enter the enclosure via the underside. The external RFcables may be routed from top or bottom of the enclosure. All cables have specified routes between the enclosure body and each connector. The Horizoncompact has no duplexer or isolator/combiner module in the chassis. A duplexer is found in the Horizoncompact booster for Tx2/Rx output and input. There are two isolators, one in each transmit path from the Dual Transceiver (DTRX) module. The outputs go directly to the Horizoncompact booster. The following diagrams show the location of modules:
4-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
RDIS module DTRX module (incorporating the duplexer and combiner/solator module) Antenna connector
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-9
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
4-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
Front view
RDIS module DTRX module (incorporating the isolator modules) RX cable connector (external 'N' type RF connector) TX1 cable connector TX2 cable connector slave master (external 'N' type RF connector) (external 'N' type RF connector)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-11
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
4-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
AC-DC APSM
Distribution board
Battery
Dino/rhino
Clamp
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-13
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
4-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
Battery connector
MMI interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Booster
Booster
Overview of booster
The Horizoncompact booster is designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided, and once this is in place, the complete Horizoncompact booster can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizoncompact booster is provided with a moulded cover which, when removed, allows access for maintenance purposes. All cables enter via the underside of the unit.
4-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Booster
Version 1 Rev 3
AC power socket
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Distribution board
Functional description The power supplies generated by the ac-dc PSM are distributed, via the distribution board, and used by the various modules listed below. The power supply levels are all controlled by the ac-dc PSM, and there are no adjustable parameters. An optional battery provides an auxiliary power source in the event of ac mains failure.
4-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
AC-DC PSM
Distribution board
Battery cable
Battery
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-19
Version 1 Rev 3
Digital modules
Digital modules
Overview of digital modules
The digital modules within Horizoncompact consist of the following: Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS) module. DINO/RHINO module. High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) module. Line termination modules.
RDIS The RDIS is the main digital control module containing the Main Control Unit, micro (MCU-m) and the Olympus Radio Architecture Controller (ORAC). There are two ORACs, each designed to support a single, dual-rate basic GSM RF carrier. DINO/RHINO The DINO/RHINO module provides the functionality required to interface with the network. The DINO has both E1 and T1 variants. The RHINO supports E1 only. High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) module The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads shared over two twisted-pair cables. Line termination modules To facilitate the customer options that require connection to an Horizoncompact and to provide an EMC screen between the internal electronics and the environment, modules are provided to interface with either the 2.048 Mbits/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) links and High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) 135 ohm links.
4-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
The maximum number of carriers is limited to two and the RDIS is designed to drive both carrier units directly. The MCU-m is customized to drive two ORACs.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
4-21
Version 1 Rev 3
The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management, together with BTS call processing (RRSM and CRM). The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and the two ORAC functional blocks.
Processor functionality
The MCU-m processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companion mode with a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration and peripheral functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for the TCU BCF links. The main processing section of the MCU-m currently supports 16 Mbytes of RAM. The DRAM system implements an ECC system for high data integrity. The boot up code is stored in a 1 Mbyte flash EPROM, a further 0.5 Mbytes of flash EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage. A Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) is supported via a PCMCIA interface. This allows flash memory cards of various sizes to be fitted.
68LC060 processor
The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of 25 MHz (the reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companion mode). The on-board Memory Management Unit (MMU) provides write protection of memory areas, particularly program storage areas.
4-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 5
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-1
Version 1 Rev 3
5-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Identify and state the purpose of the Horizonmicro2/compact2. Describe the functions and simplified operation of the Horizonmicro2/compact2. Identify and describe the simplified operation of the Horizonmicro2/compact2 Digital and RF modules.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizoncompact2 power The Horizoncompact2 incorporates a booster that enables it to provide macro coverage. The BTS contains two transmitter amplifiers, which provide the following power outputs: The GSM900 version boosts the BTS output of 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) per carrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier. The DCS1800 version, boosts the BTS output of 2.0 W (33.0 dBm) per carrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier. The booster is connected to a single BTS and antenna. An omni macro site comprising three BTSs requires three boosters.
Software requirements
Software release GSR4 limits the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 to function only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. Software release GSR5 or later is required to support the expansion feature for the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. The GSR5 software is needed in both master and slave BTSs to enable the master/slave relationship. If GSR4 software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSL connection will be functional.
Battery backup
Battery backup allows a minimum of five minutes full operation for the BTS only; the booster has no battery backup. During battery backup operation the booster operates in bypass mode.
5-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Frequency hopping
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 support synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH).
Links
Options exist for sites to be interconnected by E1 or HDSL (star and daisy chain) links. NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
Figure 61 shows a Horizonmicro2 BTS with expansion unit cover fitted and Figure 62 shows a Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster unit.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-5
Version 1 Rev 3
5-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizonmicro2External View
RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 1
RF CABLE TO ANTENNA 2
RF CABLING
Wall Mounted
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-7
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
BTS enclosure
Overview of the BTS enclosure
The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, the complete Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are provided with moulded covers which can be removed to allow access for maintenance purposes. All input and output cables (for example, ac power, HDSL and E1 lines) enter the enclosure via the underside. The external RF cables may be routed from either the top or bottom of the enclosure. All cables have specified routes between the enclosure body and each connector. The Horizonmicro2 has a built in duplexer and isolator/combiner module for Tx1/Rx output and input. The Horizoncompact2 does not contain a duplexer or isolator/combiner module in the chassis. The duplexer is located in the Horizoncompact2 booster for Tx/Rx output and input. There are two isolators; one in each transmit path from the dual transceiver (DTRX) module. The outputs go directly to the Horizoncompact2 booster. Figure 63 shows the locations of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 modules and components. Figure 64 shows the location of BTS components and connectors.
5-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
AC SUPPLY SOCKET AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE DUMMY CONNECTORS RX/TX CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) RDIS MODULE
AC SUPPLY SOCKET AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR MASTER (External N-type RF connector) DTRX MODULE (incorporating isolator modules) TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE (External N-type RF connector) RX CABLE CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) RDIS MODULE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-9
Version 1 Rev 3
BTS enclosure
5-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BTS enclosure
Version 1 Rev 3
Component Location
AC-DC PSM
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
DINO/RHINO
HDSL MODULES
BATTERY
Front view
BATTERY CONNECTOR
MMI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Booster
Booster
Overview of the booster
The Horizoncompact2 booster is designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, the complete Horizoncompact2 booster can easily be installed onto the bracket. The Horizoncompact2 booster is provided with a moulded cover which can be removed to allow access for maintenance purposes. The cables for ac power, HDSL and E1 links enter via the underside of the unit. RF cables may be routed from either the top or bottom. There is a difference in the design between the GSM900 booster and DCS1800 booster (see Figure 65 and Figure 66). Figure 65 shows the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster with cover removed. Figure 66 shows the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster with cover removed.
5-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Booster
Version 1 Rev 3
RX
TX2
ANT2 TX1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-13
Version 1 Rev 3
Overview of RF modules
Overview of RF modules
Introduction
The RF modules consist of: Dual transceiver module (DTRX). Isolator modules. NOTE To avoid problems with dust contamination of the fibre optics it is very important that the dust covers are kept in place on the fibre optic plugs at all times the cables are not connected. Please strictly observe the warning label affixed on the DTRX module.
Figure 67 shows the location of the RF modules on the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.
5-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Overview of RF modules
Version 1 Rev 3
AC POWER SOCKET
RDIS MODULE
Horizon micro2
DUMMY CONNECTORS RX/TX1/TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR (External N-type RF connector) AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
AC POWER SOCKET
RDIS MODULE
Horizon compact2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Overview of RF modules
5-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Overview of RF modules
Version 1 Rev 3
COMBINER/ISOLATOR MODULE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Overview of RF modules
5-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Overview of RF modules
Version 1 Rev 3
CARRIER 0
Tx OUT
DTRX
Tx/Rx ANTENNA
COMBINED Tx
CARRIER 1
Tx OUT
Ae DUPLEXER
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx IN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-19
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizoncompact2 isolators
Horizoncompact2 isolators
Overview of the isolators
The isolators are high performance single stage directional Tx power modules, used in the Horizoncompact2. Due to its electromagnetic properties, it enables a low loss forward path through to the Horizoncompact2 booster Tx port and isolates in the reverse path. This module provides isolation of multiple frequencies in the GSM900 and DCS1800 BTS to reduce intermodulation distortion. The isolator reduces reverse intermodulation by absorbing the power of an interferer into its internal load. This module also prevents possible damage to the RF power amplifier resulting from load mismatches. Figure 611 shows the location of the isolators and DTRX board on the Horizoncompact2. Figure 612 shows the external view of the Horizoncompact2 isolator module.
5-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Horizoncompact2 isolators
Version 1 Rev 3
NTYPE CONNECTOR
NTYPE CONNECTORS
ISOLATOR MODULES
DTRX BOARD
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-21
Version 1 Rev 3
Horizoncompact2 isolators
5-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Horizoncompact2 isolators
Version 1 Rev 3
Tx1/Rx ANTENNA
Tx
AMP
Tx1
Tx1 OUT
DUPLEXER Rx
DTRX
ANT FILTER
Tx
AMP
Tx2
Tx2 OUT
Rx IN BOOSTER BTS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Components
The power supply system comprises: An ac-dc power supply module (AC-DC PSM). A distribution board. A backup battery. Figure 614 shows the location of the power supply system components.
5-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
AC-DC PSM
BATTERY
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Digital modules
Digital modules
Overview of digital modules
The digital modules within Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 consist of the following: Radio digital interface system (RDIS) module. DINO/RHINO module. High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module. Line termination modules.
RDIS module
The RDIS is the digital control module containing the main control unit micro (MCU-m) and the olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC). The MCU-m is customized to drive two ORACs, each support a single GSM RF carrier. The RDIS provides the processing platform for the control software, the main software functions being: Call processing (CP). Cell resource manager (CRM). Radio resource state machine (RRSM). Switching. Support of DTRX - connection is made to two ORACs.
DINO/RHINO module
The DINO/RHINO module provides the functionality required to interface with the network. The DINO/RHINO supports E1 interfaces.
HDSL module
The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads shared over two twisted-pair cables. NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
5-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management, together with BTS call processing (RRSM and CRM). The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and the two ORAC functional blocks.
Processor functionality
The MCU-m processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companion mode with a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration and peripheral functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for the DTRX-BCF links. The main processing section of the MCU-m currently supports 16 Mbytes of RAM. The DRAM system implements an ECC system for high data integrity. The boot up code is stored in a 2 Mbyte flash EPROM. A further 1 Mbyte of flash EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage. A code storage facility processor (CSFP) is supported via a PCMCIA interface. This allows flash memory cards of various sizes to be fitted.
68LC060 processor
The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of 25 MHz (the reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companion mode). The on-board memory management unit (MMU) provides write protection of memory areas, particularly program storage areas.
QUICC32 processor
The QUICC32 processor is a pin compatible derivative of the 68360. There are minor hardware changes and microcode changes which permit the serial communications channel (SCCI) to operate as a 32 channel HDLC controller, utilizing the CPM RISC controller to perform the processing. The QUICC32 processor operates at 25 MHz. This also defines the external bus speed of the 68LC060 processor. The on-board system integration features of the QUICC32 provide peripheral control functions to support the 68LC060 processor.
PCMCIA interface
The loading and storage of software may be done via the PCMCIA interface. The PCMCIA socket is an industry standard 68-pin single socket, accessible from the underside of the enclosure when the MMI cover plate is removed. The PCMCIA interface is controlled using a Cirrus Logic PC card socket controller. The PCMCIA interface is provided to support rev 2.1 type I cards.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-27
Version 1 Rev 3
Crosspoint switch
This application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) provides central switching capabilities for the MCU-m. It switches TDM links between two ORACs, two network interfaces and two links to the processing section, one link to the sync processor and also two links for the expansion fibre optics. The ASIC also provides link interface features associated with the ORAC links, these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the ORAC, and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link. All of the serial links into the ASIC are E1, 125 s frame, 32 eight-bit timeslots per frame.
Sync block
The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates all required local references from a high stability local clock source, taking 15 minutes to stabilize from warm-up. This clock source may also be locked to the incoming network clocks. The sync block provides the following reference pulses and reference clock: 16.384 MHz 125 s 60 ms 6.12 s
The sync function is controlled by the main processing section via a parallel port. The clock select block receives all of the possible sources of reference signal: Extracted clock from the DINO/RHINO. One of the sources is selected as a reference and up to two others can be monitored and prioritized as backup references should the primary reference fail. The sync block can also operate in free-running mode, using the ovenized voltage controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). NOTE The OXCO requires calibration when the frame-slip alarm threshold is exceeded. This should only occur a few times in the life of the equipment, due to the slow ageing characteristic of the OCXO.
The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. It includes an OCXO (accurate to 0.05 ppm), a phase comparator and a loop filter.
MMI interface
The main processing section is provided with a TTY interface to the QUICC32. This interface does not support hardware handshaking. The serial ports support a baud rate of 9.6 kbit/s (no parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits per character).
Electronic board ID
Electronic board ID is supported by the slow flash memory (non-volatile data memory). This storage contains the following information: RDIS module serial number - 16 bytes. Kit number - 16 bytes. Description - 32 bytes.
5-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Overview of ORAC
Each ORAC is part of the RDIS and is designed to support a single, dual-rate basic GSM RF carrier.
Overview of DINO/RHINO
The DINO/RHINO module provides the interface to the network. This function is separated from the MCU-m section of RDIS due to the variety of interfaces that can be provided. The DINO board provides a 120 ohm twisted pair E1 or 135 ohm twisted pair HDSL interface. The RHINO board provides a 75 ohm coax E1 or 135 ohm twisted pair HDSL interface. A local microcontroller is provided for network interface configuration and supervision. This is controlled by the MCU-m and communicates with the DINO/RHINO microcontroller via a HDLC link. The DINO/RHINO module is fitted between the RDIS and DTRX modules.
Overview of HDSL
NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs. Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.
The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads shared over two twisted-pair cables. These cables are generally unshielded standard telephone cables.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-29
Version 1 Rev 3
Links can be either E1 or HDSL, and can be mixed as appropriate within the network. Conversion to/from E1 and HDSL can be performed either at a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 or by use of external HDSL modems.
5-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
DINO/RHINO Connections
J3 (MMI)
DINO (E1/HDSL)
J11 J13 J12
RHINO (E1/HDSL)
J14 J15 J16 J17 J13 J12
DINO LABEL
ALARM PORT PIN TX 1 & 6 A RX 2 & 7
J11
PORT PIN TX 3 & 8 B RX 4 & 9 INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
RHINO LABEL
ALARM
J14
TX A
J15
RX A
J16
TX B
J17
RX B
INTERNAL SLAVE
J13
INTERNAL MASTER
HDSL OPTION
J12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-31
Version 1 Rev 3
Expansion feature
Expansion feature
Expansion feature overview
The Expansion feature allows two or three BTSs to be connected together to effectively form a four or six carrier site. When the expansion feature is used, the two or three Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS units in the expanded system are interconnected by fibre optic cables. One BTS in the configuration acts as a master and the attached units act as slaves. In an expanded system only the master BTS is connected to the network, by an E1/HDSL interface; the slaves are not. Each slave unit requires one fibre optic cable to be connected to the master, serving for downlink and uplink data. The slave BTS also receives synchronization signals on the downlink. Figure 616 show a fully expanded Horizonmicro2 system.
5-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Expansion feature
Version 1 Rev 3
Expansion Feature
MASTER BTS
SLAVE BTS
SLAVE BTS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-33
Version 1 Rev 3
Expansion feature
Configuration data
Hardware configuration information must be determined at the OMC-R in order to facilitate the dispatching of field technicians with the proper source equipment. The additional configuration information required is: Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS cabinet type. The following Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS site configuration is also required to describe the hardware configuration. This data can be obtained from the BSS/MIB database or is detectable from the hardware. GSM900 or DCS1800. HDSL to E1 NIU. CSFP (PCMCIA card for alternative load storage). Integrated antenna equipped.
5-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Expansion feature
Version 1 Rev 3
Antenna options
The Horizonmicro2 has an optional internal antenna and can also use an external antenna. The Horizoncompact2 is connected to a booster which in turn is connected to two external antennas.
Software requirement
Software release GSR5 or later is required for the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 expansion feature to be available. GSR5 software is needed in both master and slave BTSs of an expanded system to enable the master/slave relationships to be established. Software release GSR4 allows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 to function only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. If GSR4 software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSL connection will function.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
5-35
Version 1 Rev 3
Expansion feature
5-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BSC/RXCDR Equipment
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 6
BSC/RXCDR Equipment
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-1
Version 1 Rev 3
BSC/RXCDR Equipment
6-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the types and configurations of BSSC Cabinet State the BSC System capacity List the BSC digital equipment Describe the function of the BSC digital equipment
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Overview
Overview
Introduction
This section describes the component parts that make up the BSC and RXCDR. This chapter contains: A description of the BSSC cabinets. BSU shelf capacity limits. RXU shelf capacity limits. Scaleable BSC.
6-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BSSC cabinets
Version 1 Rev 3
BSSC cabinets
BSSC cabinet
A standalone BSSC cabinet, shown in , contains only digital hardware. There is no RF equipment. The cabinets nominal operating voltage is + 27 V dc or -48/-60 V dc. The cabinet has a front access with all external interconnections made to the top of the cabinet.
Cabinet dimensions
The dimensions of the BSSC cabinet are 712 mm wide x 415 mm deep x 2100 mm high.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-5
Version 1 Rev 3
BSSC cabinets
Cabinet types
Three different types of cabinet exist; not all are in current production. SW1000A The SW1000A cabinet (BSSC) contains BSU1 and RXU1 card cages with nut and stud power connections. Only digital power supply modules (DPSM) can be fitted in the cage power supply unit shelf. SW1025A The SW1025A cabinet (BSSC2) contains BSU2 and RXU2 card cages with nut and stud power connections. Enhanced power supply modules (EPSM) for +27 V dc working and integrated power supply modules (IPSM) for -48 V dc/-60 V dc working can be fitted in the cage power supply unit shelf. SW1037A The SW1037A cabinet (BSSC2) contains BSU2 and RXU2 card cages with push fit power connections. Enhanced power supply modules (EPSM) for +27 V dc working and integrated power supply modules (IPSM) for -48 V/-60 V dc working can be fitted in the cage power supply unit shelf.
Standard equipment
A BSSC cabinet includes the following standard equipment: One BSSC cabinet hardware kit. One distribution alarm board.
6-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BSSC cabinets
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 6-1
BSSC capacities Unit BSU shelves RXU shelves BSU shelf RXU shelf
Quantity 2 or 2 or 1 1
Quantity 3 or 3
Table 6-3 lists the digital modules used in a BSU shelf with the maximum number, of each type, that can be fitted. Table 6-3 BSSC BSU shelf digital module capacity Unit Generic processor (GPROC) or (GPROC2) Multiple serial interface (MSI/MSI-2) Transcoder (XCDR) or Generic DSP processor (GDP) Generic clock (GCLK) Kiloport switch (KSW), uses MSI slots Local area network extender (LANX) Parallel interface extender (PIX) Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) Clock extender (CLKX), uses KSWX slots Bus terminator card (BTC) Battery backup board (BBBX) All MSI/MSI-2 and GDP/XCDR modules must fit into slots six through 17.
Quantity 8 12 6 2 2 2 2 18 6 2 1 NOTE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-7
Version 1 Rev 3
BSSC cabinets
Quantity 3 or 3
Table 6-5 lists the digital modules used in a RXU shelf with the maximum number that can be fitted. Table 6-5 BSSC RXU shelf digital module capacity Unit Generic processor (GPROC) or (GPROC2) Multiple serial interface (MSI/MSI-2) (See note below) Transcoder (XCDR) or Generic DSP processor (GDP), uses MSI slots (See note below) Generic clock (GCLK) Kiloport switch (KSW) Local area network extender (LANX) Parallel interface extender (PIX) Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) Clock extender (CLKX), uses KSWX slots Bus terminator card (BTC) Battery backup board (BBBX) There are 19 slots for external interconnection, 14 of these can accommodate GDP/XCDRs and five can support either an MSI or GDP/XCDR. The maximum number of XCDRs that can be accommodated is 16.
Quantity 2 5 16 2 2 2 2 18 6 2 1 NOTE
6-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BSSC cabinets
Version 1 Rev 3
RXU3
The existing RXU cage provides 19 MSI slots (see Note), of which 5 are considered MSI-capable, meaning they have connectivity for two E1 span lines. The other 14 slots can terminate only one E1 span line, as they were designed to hold GDPs (or the older XCDRs). The RXU3 cage provides for termination of two E1 span lines per card slot. A combination of MSIs and XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s can share these 19 slots without connectivity restriction (timeslot restrictions still apply). This enables the GDP2s to be used to capacity. Within the RXCDR, enhanced capacity mode must be enabled to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in non-MSI slots. Within the current BSC, the BSU shelf contains 12 MSI slots, of which up to 6 slots may be used for the transcoder function. All slots support the connectivity for two E1 terminations per card slot, allowing GDP2s to be used to capacity. NOTE These are called MSI" slots, but they may contain either a MSI or a transcoder board.
Backhaul
When a fr call is connected, the BTS--BSC--RXCDR backhaul path is as shown on the left in Figure 6-2. 16 kbit/s backhaul is required on all the legs. When an AMR hr call is connected which includes the 7.95 kbit/s rate in the Active Codec Set, then a similar backhaul path is needed, as shown on the right in the figure below.
For a connected AMR hr call not requiring the 7.95 codec rate or a GSM hr call, if ESS mode isenabled in the BSC, but not in the RXCDR, then the backhaul path shown on the left in Figure 6-3 results. For the same call, if ESS mode is enabled in both the BSC and the RXCDR then the path shown on the right in Figure 6-3 results. (The idle tone insertion is used internally to fill out the 16 kbit/s timeslot.)
Summary
AMR transcoding can be supported using existing GDPs working in a tandem configuration, the EGDP, or with the GDP2. The former provides a capacity of one half (15 channels of FR/EFR/AMR per card slot) of what is currently supported for the GDP (30 channels FR/EFR/HR per card slot), the latter double the capacity (60 channels of FR/EFR/HR/AMR per card slot). GSM HR transcoding can be supported with the GDP (30 channels) or the GDP2 (60 channels). GDP2s will work in the existing RXU shelf, but only at half capacity because there is connectivity of only one E1 per card slot (for most slots). The RXU3 shelf provides 2 x E1 connectivity for all card slots (enhanced capacity mode must be enabled to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in nonMSI slots). The existing BSU shelf provides two E1 connectors per card slot, for local transcoding configurations. The current BSSC2 cabinet provides for 48 E1 terminations. In order to use the RXU3 shelves to capacity the BSSC3 cabinet has been developed. This can terminate 76 E1 span lines. The DSW2 can be utilized to reduce backhaul costs between both the BTS and BSC and the BSC and RXCDR, when hr is used. Additionally, within the RXCDR, use of DSW2s/DSWXs can support a greater number of timeslots, which translates to more combinations of card types, particularly MSIs. The proper combination(s) of equipment needs to be tailored per network.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-9
Version 1 Rev 3
GSR4 100 250 384 634 250 128 250 232 1920 16 102 57,600
GSR4.1 100 250 384 634 250 128 250 232 1920 16 102 57,600
GSR5 100 250 384 634 250 128 250 232 2400 16 102 72,000
GSR5.1 100 250 384 634 250 128 250 232 2400 16 102 72,000
GSR6 100 250 3841 634 250 128 250 232 24001 16 102 72,000
GSR7 100 250 3841,2 634 250 128 250 232 24001,2 16 102 90,000
Can be increased to 512 carriers and 3200 trunks if the optional enhanced BSC capacity feature is enabled. GSR7, when enhanced BSC capacity and AMR (and/or GSM half rate) are both enabled, it is mandatory to deploy GPROC3s in active and/or standby BSP slots in the BSC in any potential BSP slots on a site, i.e. slot 20 and 24 in shelf 0, slot 20 in shelf 1. Otherwise, it is optional to replace BSP GPROC2s with GPROC3s in the BSC. NOTE The capacities represent the BSS capacities for GSM circuit-switched traffic. If the GPRS traffic is carried on the BSS, the GSM circuit-switched traffic handling capacity reduces in direct proportion to the timeslots configured for GPRS traffic. The maximum Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) is computed for the standard call model. The actual value depends on the average call duration on a network. When planning a BSC, any limit given in the above table should not be exceeded for the GSR version used. The first element to reach its limit sets the capacity of the BSC. For example, when dimensioning a BSC with a specific non-standard call model, there is possibility that the LCF or C7 limit will be reached before the Erlang limit is reached.
2In
6-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Scaleable BSC
With the launch of the Scaleable BSC in GSR4, Motorola is moving to a position where the diverse requirements of network operators in terms of BSC size are addressed by a single platform that can be efficiently configured in small, medium or large models. For existing customers the move to a Scaleable BSC is enabled through the migration of the processing boards within the BSC to use the GPROC2 throughout. BSSs targeted at small, medium or large networks are efficiently addressed by the Scaleable BSC where minimal incremental hardware is required to be added as the networks grow. Being able to expand capacity within a BSC is appealing from an operational viewpoint because there is less time and effort involved than compared with having to move sites from one BSC to another, or even from one OMC to another. Put into context, the BSC capacity prior to GSR3 supports in the order of 40 sites of three sectors and one carrier per sector; or alternatively, 20 sites of three sectors and two carriers per sector. At GSR3, the capacity increased to allow the operator to move to support in the order of 40 sites of three sectors and two carriers per sector. At GSR4, the capacity increased to allow the operator to move to support in the order of 64 sites of three sectors and two carriers per sector. The Scaleable BSC also offers a substantial advantage for microcellular deployment where a single BSC is able to support up to 100 microcellular BTSs, each equipped with two carriers per site. The Scaleable BSC capacity is enabled because of the increased processing performance and memory of the GPROC2. The maximum capacity is increased as shown in . This increased capacity is achieved through the deployment of GPROC2s for each function at the BSC, including base station processor (BSP) and link control function (LCF).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Line interfaces
The line interfaces, balanced-line interface board (BIB) and T43 board (T43), provide impedance matching for E1 and T1 links. The BSSC cabinet can accommodate up to 48 bidirectional links, 24 links per shelf, using eight line interface boards (six links connected to each board). The line interface boards are installed on the top of the cabinet and connect to the BSU shelf by cable. Balanced-line interface board (BIB) To match a balanced 120 ohm (E1 2.048 Mbit/s) or balanced 110 ohm (T1 1.544 Mbit/s) 3 V (peak pulse) line use a BIB. Each input and output is isolated from the backplane by up to 1500 V. T43 board (T43) To match a single ended 75 ohm 2.37 V (peak pulse) line use a T43. Each input and output is isolated from the backplane by up to 1500 V.
6-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
The GPROC processor is a 68030 microprocessor. The board provides a memory management unit to support task and data isolation methods in software. The GPROC contains 16 megabytes of RAM that may be optionally backed up by a battery located external to the cabinet using the BBBX board. One megabyte of flash EPROM, and 32 kilobytes of non-volatile RAM are also provided on the GPROC. The board has interfaces for redundant 16 Mbit/s IEEE 802.5 (token ring) LANs. Up to sixteen 64 kbit/s serial interfaces, which directly support the LAPB/D and ITU-TSS C7 layer 1 and 2 protocols, are accessible by way of the TDM switch highway. A serial interface for asynchronous (300 bit/s -19.2 kbit/s) or synchronous communications is provided on the front panel this allows connection to a maintenance TTY or personal computer. An interface to a processor bus extension (the MCAP bus) is also provided.
GPROC2 is a second generation processor module. Its main purpose remains the same as that of a GPROC. GPROC2, however, has been significantly redesigned to provide a substantial increase in both processor performance and available memory. The GPROC2 processor is a 68040 microprocessor that combined with 32 Mbytes of memory offers a performance gain of that of a GPROC and a doubling of memory space. The memory on GPROC2 uses error detection and correction circuitry to guard against failure of memory cells. GSR5.1 introduced a fast reset feature for the GPROC. This enables the GPROC to be reset faster by negating the need for RAM to ROM transition on a reset. The GPROC will still be taken off of the LAN and then come back up on the LAN in Ram and go through the RAM initialization. Some events however will still require a RAM-ROM transition, the instances that require this are varied and constantly under review. There will be an indication at the terminal whether the fatal event initiated a RAM-ROM or RAM-RAM reset.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-13
Version 1 Rev 3
6-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Transcoder (XCDR)
The XCDR provides the following functions: The interface between one external E1 link from the MSC and the internal TDM highway. Bidirectional conversion between 13 kbit/s GSM speech and 64 kbit/s A-law PCM. Subrate multiplexing of four 16 kbit/s timeslots (13 kbit/s of GSM speech mapped onto 16 kbit/s timeslots) mapped onto one 64 kbit/s port. For data calls, the XCDR provides the rate adaptation function (RA2) from 16 kbit/s to 64 kbit/s. Signalling channels are routed straight through the transcoder. Each signalling channel always requires one 64 kbit/s circuit. Transcoding at the MSC allows up to 4:1 improvement in E1/T1 link utilization between the BSC and MSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-15
Version 1 Rev 3
The GDP module: Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at the RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC. Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway. Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels: Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization. One of the channels may be reserved for link control signalling. The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.
Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. These channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in any of the 1016 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2. The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs: GSM-defined speech encoding. GSM-defined speech decoding. Submultiplexing functions. The speech transcoder bidirectionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface. Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.
6-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
CLKX
KSW 1 Switch cabinet R - Remote KSWX R L - Local KSWX L E - Expansion KSWE CLKX 2 3 4 5
Extension cabinets 2 - 5
R KSW
6 Switch cabinet
10
Extension cabinets 7 - 10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-17
Version 1 Rev 3
in a 50% saving in backhaul costs per 8 kbit/s AMR-capable carrier. Without 8 kbit/s switching, each half rate call will require a full 16 kbit/s backhaul bearer, or four 64 kbit/s timeslots per carrier. With 8 kbit/s switching, the same backhaul as is required for full rate (two 64 kbit/s timeslots) is used. A similar saving can be achieved on the BSC - RXCDR interface. When ESS mode is enabled in the BSC, 8 kbit/s backhaul can be used between the BTS and BSC. For every connected RXCDR with ESS enabled, 8 kbit/s backhaul can be used between the BSC and that RXCDR. Use of ESS mode requires all DSWs to be used (within the BSC or RXCDR). KSWXs and DSWXs may be used (exclusively or mixed), with the restriction that a KSWX may not be connected to a DSWX or vice-versa. EC mode is available in the RXCDR and can be used to increase the number of timeslots available. Each card (i.e. MSIs, GDPs, EGDPs, and GDP2s) requires a specific number of timeslots. By increasing the number of timeslots available across two shelves, more combinations of equipment are possible. This capability is likely to be used in conjunction with the RXU3 shelf, which provides for additional T1 connectivity. EC mode requires the use of all DSWs and DSWXs. DSWs and DSWXs are backwards compatible with KSWs and KSWXs, and are interchangeable (in non-ESS and non-EC modes) with, again, the restriction that a KSWX may not be connected to a DSWX or vice-versa.
6-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Mode KSWXR
KSWXL
KSWXE
NOTE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-19
Version 1 Rev 3
6-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Figure 6-1
GCLK
CLKX
KSWX L
Backplane
Backplane
KSWXL
KSWXL
Shelf number 4
Backplane
Backplane
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-21
Version 1 Rev 3
6-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning Considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the NVM complement: Only one NVM board can be installed at the BSC. The NVM board uses slot 26 in the BSU cage 0 (master) of the BSC, which is an unused slot. The appropriate software required to support the NVM board must be loaded at the OMC-R and downloaded to the BSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
6-23
Version 1 Rev 3
6-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 7
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-1
Version 1 Rev 3
7-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Define the steps for the planning of the BSC. Explain the impact on BSC planning of the 2G-3G handover feature. Determine the signalling link requirments for a BSC. Determine the digital card requirments for a BSC. Give a brief description of the BSC digital cards and their functions.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
Chapter overview
Introduction
This chapter provides the planning steps and rules or the BSC. The planning steps and rules for the BTS are in Chapter 4 of this manual. This chapter contains: BSC planning overview. Capacity calculations. Determining the required BSS signalling link capacities. Determine the number of RSLs required. Determine the number of MTLs required. BSC GPROC functions and types. Traffic models. Planning rules for BSC to BTS links (E1/T1). Planning rules for BSC to BTS links (RSL). Planning rules for BSC to MSC links (MTL). Planning rules for the digital modules. Planning rules for the digital shelf power supply.
BSC planning.
7-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-5
Version 1 Rev 3
Mixing of equipment types When mixing BSU and RXU shelves at a BSC the planning rules for each type of shelf must be taken into account. This will require using the information contained in this chapter (for the BSC) and Chapter 7 (for the RXCDR), as the RXU shelf is primarily used in the RXCDR. This applies to both the legacy RXU shelf and the new RXU3 shelf. This is also true for the cabinets. The additional connectivity provided by the new BSSC3 may be required in the BSC when the RXU3 shelf or shelves are used.
7-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Capacity calculations
Capacity calculations
Introduction
The throughput capacities of the BSC processing elements (for example, GPROC, GPROC2, GPROC3) and the throughput capacities of its data links, determines the number of supported traffic channels (TCHs). These capacities are limited by the ability of the processors, and links to handle the signalling information associated with these TCHs. This section provides information on how to calculate processor requirements, signalling link capacities and BSC processing capacities. This section describes: Traffic models. The required BSS signalling link capacities. BSC GPROC functions and types. The number of GPROCs required.
7-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Capacity calculations
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-9
Version 1 Rev 3
As well as the factors described in Figure 7-1, when LCS is enabled in the BSS, the following factors need to be taken into account when planning a BSS: MTL link provisioning to support LCS signalling between the MSC and BSC for either NSS-based LCS architecture or BSS-based LCS architecture, but not both. LMTL link provisioning for BSS-based LCS architecture only. RSL link provisioning with LCS supported.
7-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Figure 7-1
MSC Transcoder
With submultiplexing transcoding at MSC 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/C7 signalling link 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/X.25 signalling link* 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/XBL 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/4 trunks Without submultiplexing transcoding at BSC 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/C7 signalling link 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/X.25 signalling link* 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/trunk
A interface (terrestrial links) - C7 signalling links - X.25 control link* - required trunks
The BSC to MSC 64 kbit/s circuits are determined from the # of trunks required to carry the summation of air interface traffic (in erlangs, typically using 1% blocking) from all BTSs - plus The # of C7 signalling links - plus - (if applicable*) The # of X.25 links (usually one per BSC) - plus The # of XBL links BSC Motorola BSC/BTS interface non-blocking 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit/LAPD signalling link 2 x 64 kbit/s circuits/DRCU/SCU
The # of TCHs required (using typically 2% blocking) to carry subscriber traffic. The TCHs plus the required signalling TSs divided by eight determines the carriers required (on a BTS/sector basis) BTS Air interface - TCHs and signalling TSs - Typically 2% blocking Air interface (traffic in erlangs)
Transcoding must be located at the BSC, or between the BSC and MSC TCH TS * = Traffic channel = Timeslot X.25 may be passed to RXCDR or MSC site
Using traffic, to determine E1/T1 link interconnect hardware for the 'A' and 'BSC to BTS' interface
NOTE
4 x 64kbit/s circuits/RTF for an AMR half-rate RTF and 8kbit/s switching is not provisioned, or the 7.95kbit/s HR codec mode is included in the codec set.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-11
Version 1 Rev 3
7-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Air interface The BSS inter-RAT handover function introduces the system information message: SYSTEM INFORMATION 2quater. The existing SI2ter, SI3, SI13 and the HANDOVER COMMAND messages will be updated to allow a multi-RAT MS to perform measurements on UMTS Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) neighbour cells for the purpose of cell reselection. The CLASSMARK UPDATE message is updated to support the MS revision level (2) multi-RAT MS. CCDSP firmware has been updated to store multiple instances of the SI2ter and SI2quater messages. Abis interface The Abis Interface supports changes to the A-interface required for messages passed from the BSC to the BTS. A-interface The HANDOVER REQUEST message sent from the MSC is updated with a new serving area identifier within the cell identifier (serving). This indicates that the handover originates from a UMTS network. This interface also provides support for the Information Interface Equipment (IE) at the handing over BSS to that at the receiving BSS. This container can contain a number of User Equipment (UE) specific IEs relating to the capabilities of the multi-RAT MS. BSS database The BSS database is updated to allow the provisioning of UTRAN cells to be specified as neighbours of existing GSM cells. The database also supports the configuration of new parameters associated with the messaging to the multi-RAT MS. System architecture shows the system architecture for the GSM BSS inter-RAT handover feature.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-13
Version 1 Rev 3
GSM-UMTS Architecture
EInterface
Gn Interface
AInterface
lu PsInterface
BSS
PCU BSC
Abis
RNS lur
RNC
lub
RNC
lub
BTS
BTS
Node B
Node B
Um
Uu
Multi - rat MS
Existing 2G core network (CN) nodes must be able to interact with the 3G CN nodes through MAP procedures defined on the E-interface between a 2G CN node and 3G CN node. The GSM BSS inter-RAT handover feature does not support: Cell reselection to UTRAN TDD neighbour cells or CDMA2000 neighbour cells. Dedicated call handover procedures from GSM to UMTS. Extended measurement reporting. Enhanced measurement reporting. The sending of a UMTS frequency list as part of the RR-CHANNEL RELEASE message. Blind search. The sending of SI2quater on extended BCCH. The BSS restricts the maximum number of UTRAN neighbours per GSM cell to 16. Statistics are not be supported by the BSS for this feature. The OMC-R interface only supports UTRAN neighbour cells which have a unique RNC-id and cell id combination within the BSS database.
7-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-15
Version 1 Rev 3
= 0.20
= 0.25 = 0.4
(BSC - RXCDR)
The location update factor (L) is a function of the ratio of location updates to calls (l), the ratio of IMSI detaches to calls (I) and whether the short message sequence (type 1) or long message sequence (type 2) is used for IMSI detach; typically I = 0 (that is IMSI detach is disabled) as in the first formula given below. When IMSI detach is enabled, the second or third of the formulas given below should be used. The type of IMSI detach used is a function of the MSC.
7-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 7-2
Other parameters used in determining GPROC and link requirements Parameter reference N B PPC = P * (T/N)
Busy hour peak signalling traffic model Number of MSC - BSC trunks Number of BTSs per BSS Pages per call
Procedure Call setup and clearing Handover, incoming and outgoing Location update SMS-P to P (see note below) IMSI detach (type 1) IMSI detach (type 2) Paging NOTE
Table 7-4
Procedure capacities (BSC - BTS) BSC to BTS link 10 downlink messages with average size of 21 bytes 11 uplink messages with average size of 23 bytes 8 downlink messages with average size of 23 bytes 6 uplink messages with average size of 30 bytes 5 downlink messages with average size of 23 bytes 4 uplink messages with average size of 22 bytes
Procedure Call setup and clearing Handover, incoming and outgoing Location update
7-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 7-4
Procedure capacities (BSC - BTS) (Continued) 7 downlink messages with average size of 42 bytes 7 uplink messages with average size of 42 bytes 1 downlink message. Message size depends on the number of cells to be paged on a site. For a 3 cell site, messge size for CS paging = 24 bytes. From GSR6 onwards, the BSS software uses a small message header (compact header) for delivering messages between the BSC/PCU and the BTS. The new message header contains the minimum information necessary to deliver the messages between processes. The size of the new message header is 8 bytes, as compared to 28 bytes in pre-GR6 releases. This reduces the signalling link utilization between the BSC-BTS and BSC-PCU.
NOTE
Table 7-5
Procedure capacties (BSC-RXCDR) Procedure BSC to RXCDR link 1 downlink message with average size of 41 bytes 1 uplink message with average size of 41 bytes
An additional assumption, which is made in determining the values listed in Table 7-3, is that the procedures not included in the traffic model are considered to have negligible effect. NOTE Supplementary Service (SS) messaging has not been taken into account. This could contribute a significant signalling overhead in some networks.
Paging assumptions In calculating the average DL message size for paging, it is assumed that paging is by LAC (or LAI) only. Paging by LAC only is the recommended method. Paging by LAC and cell ID is not necessary and has two major disadvantages: The paging method is controlled by the MSC and is signalled to the BSC through the setting of the cell Identification Discriminator in the BSSMAP paging message. The BSC can determine from its Configuration Management database which cells need to be paged from the location area code only. Therefore, the MSC does not need to send a list of each cell IDs. Paging by LAC and cell ID will increase the length of the BSSMAP paging considerably and will also significantly increase the C7 signalling load between the MSC and BSC. Paging by LAC only reduces the possibility of paging channel overload on the air interface caused by any database mismatches between the BSC and MSC. If the BSC receives a cell ID in the paging message that does not exist in its own CM database, it defaults to paging all cells in the BSS for safety reasons. This can cause overload of the paging channel on the radio interface. Half rate assumptions A (AMR or {22064} GSM) half rate enabled carrier is capable of carrying two half rate calls in each timeslot, for a total of 16 (half rate) TCHs. The actual number in use at a given instance will depend upon such factors as operator (both BSS and MSC) preference, mobile (that is, AMR capable) penetration, RF conditions, handoff parameter and threshold setting, cell congestion levels, etc. If it is known to a large degree of certainty what the mix of half rate and full rate calls will be, that number can be used when considering equipment planning. Otherwise it is recommended that a worst case approach be taken. For example, when determining the RSL signalling link capacity required, and half rate usage is expected to be no more than 50%, and there are 2 (both half rate enabled) carriers, a mix of 9 fr and 10 hr (plus 2 timeslots for signalling) TCHs can be used (for a total of 19). A worst case estimate will assume 16 TCHs per half rate enabled carrier, for a total of 28 TCHs. If only one carrier were half rate enabled, worst case results in (16 hr, 6 fr) 22 TCHs.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-19
Version 1 Rev 3
When 8 kbit/s subrate switching is not available or an RTF is configured as AMR half rate capable and the 7.95 kbit/s half rate codec mode is included in the Half Rate Active Codec Set, then the carrier unit assigned to that RTF will require four 64 kbit/s timeslots on the E1 circuit (regardless of how they are utilized).
Link capacities
The level of link utilization is largely a matter of choice of the system designer. A design that has more links running at a lower message rate can have the advantage of offering better fault tolerance, since the failure of any one link affects less signalling traffic. Reconfiguration around the fault could be less disruptive. Such a design could offer reduced queueing delays for signalling messages. A design that utilizes fewer links at a higher message rate, reduces the number of 64 kbit/s circuits required for signalling, and potentially reduces the number of resources (processors, data ports) required in the MSC. It is recommended that the C7 links be designed to operate at no more than 20% link utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC1; and no more than 40% utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC2 or GPROC3. However, before use of the 40% utilization for GPROC2 or GPROC3, it is imperative that the operator verifies that the MSC vendor can also support 40% utilization at the MSC end; if not, only 20% link utilization should be used for GPROC2 and GPROC3. If higher link utilizations are used, the controlling GPROCs (LCF--MTLs) may become overloaded. NOTE Overloading GPROCs can cause the BSC to become unstable. Links must be monitored closely to ensure that link utilization does not exceed the maximum. If link utilization is regularly approaching the maximum, additional capacity should be added to reduce the possibility of overloading the GPROCs.
C7, the protocol used for the MSC to BSC links, allows for the signalling traffic from the failed link to be redistributed among the remaining functioning links. A C7 link set officially has at least two and at most 16 links. The failure of links, for any reason, cause the signalling to be shared across the remaining members of the link set. Therefore, the design must plan for reserve link and processing capacity to support a certain number of failed signalling links.
7-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the provision of RSL (LAPD signalling) links from the BSC to BTS sites: With the Motorola BSC/BTS interface there is a need for an RSL link to every BTS site. One link can support multiple collocated cells. As the system grows, additional signalling links may be required. Refer to the section Determining the required BSS signalling link capacities in this chapter to determine the number of RSL links required. If closed loop daisy chains are used, each site requires an RSL in both directions. The provision of additional RSL links for redundancy. The number of 16kbit/s RSL links is limited, depending on the platform. See 16kbit/s RSL in chapter 2 for further details. 64kbit/s RSLs must be used when allowable numbers are exceeded. Table lists the limitations for 16kbit/s RSLs supported on each BTS platform. BTS Platform HorizonIImacro and Horizonmacro Horizonmicr2/Horizoncompact2 M-Cell6 M-Cell2 M-Cellmicro and M-CellCity NOTE No. of 16kbit/s RSLs Supported 6 2 6 4 2
Horizon II macro BTSs support 4 x RSLs per E1, whereas Horizonmacro and M-Cell BTSs only support 2 x RSLs per E1. This should be taken into consideration when determining the number of E1s required to support the calculated RSLs per site.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-21
Version 1 Rev 3
n = number of TCHs at the BTS n <= 30 31 to 60 61 to 90 91 to 120 121 to 150 151 to 180 181 to 210 211 to 240 NOTE
A BTS shall support either 64 kbit/s RSLs or 16 kbit/s RSLs, but not both. 64kbit/s RSLs must be used if the allowable number of 16kbit/s RSLs has been exceeded.
7-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
If the call parameters differ significantly from those given in Table 7-1, use the following formula to determine the required number of 16 kbit/s RSLs (rounded up to the next nearest integer).
Where:
is:
the number of MSC to BSC signalling links. the number of TCH under the BSC. the ratio of SMSs to calls. the number of handovers per call. the location update factor. the percent link utilization (for example 0.20). the average call duration. the paging rate in pages per second. the number of cells per BTS.
Where:
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required (rounded up to an integer). the number of traffic channels at the BTS. the number of 16 kbit/s RSLs (LAPD links). the number of 64 kbit/s RSLs (LAPD links).
NOTE
This formula includes both L16 and L64 to provide necessary number of RSLs. As above, either L16 or L64 RSL can be used, but not both, to a single BTS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the minimum number of T1 links required (rounded up to an integer). the number of traffic channels at the BTS. the number of 16 kbit/s RSLs (LAPD links). the number of 64 kbit/s RSLs (LAPD links).
NOTE
This formula includes both L16 and L64 to provide necessary number of RSLs. As above, either L16 or L64 RSL can be used, but not both, to a single BTS.
There are two methods for calculating this number. The first is used when the call parameters are similar to those listed in Table 6-2 (standard traffic model). The second method is used when the call parameters differ significantly from those listed in Table 6-2 (standard traffic model). Standard traffic model Use the formula:
Where:
GL3 n B C
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required to support the layer 3 call processing. the number of TCH at the BSC (see AMR Half-rate assumptions earlier in this chapter). the number of BTS sites. the number of cells per BSS.
7-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Non-standard traffic model If the call parameters differ significantly from those given in Table 7-1, the alternative formula given below should be used to determine the recommended number of LCFs.
Where:
GL3 n S H i L T P B CBTS
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required to support the layer 3 call processing. the number of TCH at the BSC (see AMR Half-rate assumptions earlier in this chapter). the ratio of SMSs to calls. the number of handovers per call. the ratio of intra-BSC handovers to all handovers. the location update factor. the average call duration. the paging rate in pages per second. the number of BTS sites. the number of cells per BTS.
NOTE
Having calculated the LCF GPROCs for RSLs, ensure that the traffic is evenly distributed across the LCFs. This may be difficult in cases where large sites are being used, and in such cases additional LCFs may be required. Alternatively, use the above formula for traffic channels on each LCF. If the calculated value exceeds 1, the sites should be redistributed on the other available LCFs, or additional LCFs should be equipped.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the links from the BSC to MSC: Determine traffic requirements for the BSC. Traffic may be determined using either of the following methods: Multiply the number of subscribers expected to use the BSC by the average traffic per subscriber. or Total the traffic potential of each BTS under the BSC; determined by the number of TCHs available, the number of TCHs required or the subscriber potential.
Determine the number of trunks to support the traffic requirements of the BSC using Erlang B tables at the required blocking rate. Determine the MTL loadshare granularity to be used for the BSC. MTL loadshare granularity determines the number of logical links that will be mapped onto the physical links. Setting the mtl_loadshare_granularity database element to 1 results in a more even distribution of traffic across the MTL links. This feature gradually increases the number of MTLs required with the increased traffic load on the BSC. For example, with an increase in the number of MSC-BSC trunks from 1560 to 1600, with 20% link utilization, the number of MTLs required for a BSC goes up from 8 to 16, if using a granularity of 0. When using a granularity of 1, only 10 MTLs will be required. This results from the enhanced load sharing of MTLs. and illustrate the difference between setting the load share granularity to 0 and 1, respectively. Table 7-7 and Table 7-8 illustrate the difference between setting the loadshare granularity to 0 and 1. NOTE These calculations are for the MTLs required in the uplink direction. For the downlink direction, planning rules for the signalling link calculation provided by the MSC vendor should be used. If the number of signalling links are higher in the downlink direction, then that number should be used. If the MSC vendor does not provide the planning rules for the MTLs required in a downlink direction, then use a load share granularity of 0 to be conservative in MTL provisioning.Load sharing of MTLs in the downlink direction depends on the mechanism used by the MSC to load share the signalling links from the MSC to BSC.
CCITT C7 uses a 4 bit number, the Signalling Link Selection (SLS), generated by the upper layer to load share message traffic among the in-service links of a link set. When the number of in-service links is not a power of 2, some links may experience a higher load than others. From GSR5 release onwards, the BSS supports distribution of signalling in the uplink direction, over 64 logical links. The BSS evenly distributes the 64 logical links over the active MTLs.
7-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
The number of MTLs is a function of the number of MSC to BSC trunks or the offered call load. Table 7-7 and Table 7-8 give the recommended minimum number of MSC to BSC signalling links based on the typical call parameters, detailed in Table 7-1. The value for N is the greater of the following: The offered call load (in Erlangs) from all the BTSs controlled by the BSC. The potential carried load (approximately equal to the number of MSC to BSC trunks). The offered call load for a BSS is the sum of the offered call load from all of the cells of the BSS. The offered call load at a cell is a function of the number TCHs and blocking. As blocking increases the offered call load increase. For example, for a cell with 15 TCHs and 2% blocking, the offered call load is 9.01 Erlangs. NOTE Before setting the load share granularity to 1, it is recommended that confirmation is gained from the Motorola local contact, or local office, that the switch is compatible with the load share granularity set to 1.
Table 7-7 and Table 7-8 show how to estimate the number of MTLs to be used for the BSC, with 20% and 40% link utilization, respectively. Table 7-7 Number of MSC and BSC signalling links (20% utilization) No of MTLs with 16 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 6 6 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 Set to 2 3 4 5 7 7 9 9 9 16 16 16 16 No of MTLs with 64 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10 11 13 16 Set to 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11 12 16 16
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC Trunks or the offered load from the BTSs N <= 180 180 < N <=380 380 < N <= 520 520 < N <= 780 780 < N <= 960 960 < N <= 1040 1040 < N <= 1120 1120 < N <= 1240 1240 < N <= 1560 1560 < N <= 1780 1780 < N <= 2080 2080 < N <= 2480 2480 < N <= 3200
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-27
Version 1 Rev 3
7-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 7-8
Number of MSC and BSC signalling links (40% utilization) No of MTLs with 16 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 16 Set to 2 3 4 5 5 7 7 9 9 9 16 No of MTLs with 64 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10 Set to 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC Trunks or the offered load from the BTSs N <= 380 380 < N <= 780 780 < N <= 1040 1040 < N <= 1120 1120 < N <= 1560 1560 < N <= 1920 1920 < N <= 2080 2080 < N <= 2260 2260 < N <= 2480 2480 < N <= 3120 3120 < N <= 3200 NOTE
The capacities shown in Table 6-12 and Table 6-13 are based on the standard traffic model shown in Table 6-2. It is recommended that the C7 links be designed to operate at no more than 20% link utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC1, and no more than 40% utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC2 or GPROC3. However, before using MTLs with 40% utilization, it is imperative that the operator verifies if the MSC vendor can also support 40% utilization at the MSC end. If not, then only 20% link utilization should be used for GPROC2 and GPROC3.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-29
Version 1 Rev 3
2. Use the formula detailed below to determine the maximum number of Erlangs supported by a GPROC (LCF-MTL) supporting a C7 signalling link (nlLCF-MTL).
3. The maximum amount of traffic a MTL (a physical link) can handle (nlmin) is the smaller of the two numbers from Steps Step 1 and 2.
4. Signalling over the A-interface is uniformly distributed over a number of logical links. The number of logical links is defined on the BSC by database parameter mtl_loadshare_granularity = 0 or 1, which corresponds to 16 or 64 logical links, respectively, over which the MTL signalling is load shared. Hence, the total amount of traffic that a logical link would hold, is calculated as:
5. (nlog-per-mtl):
Next we need to determine the number of logical links each MTL (physical link) can handle
6.
NOTE
MTLs should not exceed 16 per BSC. The formula in step 2 has been calculated using 70% mean utilization of GPROC2 (see Calculate the number of LCFs for MTL processing later in this section). Field experience suggests it is good practice to maintain the mean utilization of GPROCs at or below 70%. Taking LCS into consideration, C7 is also used for LCS signalling between the BSC and MSC and LCS signalling between BSC and SMLC if BSS based LCS architecture is supported. Refer to Chapter 9, Determining the required BSS signalling link capacities.
7-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the percent link utilization (for example 0.20). call hold time. the ratio of SMSs per call. the number of handovers per call. the ratio of intra-BSC handovers to all handovers. the location update factor. the number of pages per call. the number of BTSs supported by the BSC. the number of MTLs required round up to the next integer. round down to the next integer. the minimum of two values. the number of logical links (16 or 64).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-31
Version 1 Rev 3
NOTE
LCFs for MSC to BSC links Since one LCF GPROC can support two MTLs, the number of required LCFs is:
However, if the traffic model does not conform to the standard model:
otherwise:
Where:
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required. rounding up to the next integer. calculated in the previous section. calculated in the previous section. calculated in the previous section.
7-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-33
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning Considerations
The following factors need to be considered when planning the number of XBL links from the BSC to the RXCDR: Determine the traffic requirements of the BSC and/or the number of trunks (CICs) used between the BSC and AXCDR. Determine the mode (backward compatibility or auto-connect) in which the BSC and RXCDR operate. See Chapter 2 for a description of the modes. A maximum of 20 XBLs (64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s) can be configured for a BSC/RXCDR. A BSC can connect to a maximum of 10 RXCDRs and vice versa.
Provisioning
The number of XBL links depends on the number of trunks on the BSC-AXCDR interface and whether or not the auto-connect mode is enabled at the RXCDR/BSC. Table 7-9 details the minimum number of XBLs required to support the given number of trunks between the BSC and AXCDR, with auto-connect mode. Table 7-9 Number of BSC to RXCDR signalling links No redundancy Number of 64kb/s XBLs N < 1200 1200 < N < 2400 2400 < N < 3200 1 2 3 Number of 16kb/s XBLs 4 8 11 With redundancy Number of 64kb/s XBLs 2 4 6 Number of 16kb/s XBLs 8 16 22*
*This exceeds the 20 XBL limit and is thus invalid It is recommended that the XBL link utilization does not exceed 40%. Above this level, queueing delays could become substantial. Although both auto-connect mode and enhanced auto-connect mode apply a load, it is the enhanced auto-connect mode load that can vary depending on system configuration. When operating in this mode, the XBL link utilization should be monitored to determine if additional capacity is required. The number of XBL links as shown above is a minimum number that are required, regardless of measured utilization. This is due to peak usage requirements during start up and reconfigurations due to faults and maintenance. XBL link utilisation is a network statistic, calculated on a per XBL basis.
7-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Use the following formula to determine the required number of 16 kbit/s XBLs (rounded up to the next integer):
is: the number of BSC to RXCDR signalling links. the number of MSC--BSC trunks. the average call duration in seconds. the number of XBL messages per new call. the number of XBL messages per hr <--> fr handover. the number hr <--> fr handovers per call. the average length of a XBL message in bytes. sthe percentage link utilization (0.40, for example).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-35
Version 1 Rev 3
Introduction
The GPROC2 is a direct replacement for the GPROC1. It is used throughout the Motorola BSS as a generic control processor board. This section describes the BSC GPROC types and their functions. The BSC configuration type and GPROC device type are essential factors for BSC planning. From GSR4 to GSR6 (Horizon II), GPROC2s must be installed in all the slots at the BSC. The GPROC3 is a high performance direct replacement for GPROC2s and GPROC1s, provided GSR7 (or higher) is installed. This software release allows for any combination of GPROC types to be installed. GPROC3s cannot be used wth software versions earlier than GSR7.
7-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
The defined GPROC devices and functions for the BSC are as follows (also see Table 812):
At a combined BSC BTS site, the BTF and DHP are additional GPROC function and type in the network element. Table 812 defines the GPROC types/functions for different software releases from GSR4 onwards. Software Release GSR4 to GSR6 (Horizon II) GSR7 onwards (see Note) BSP GPROC2 GPROC2 or GPROC3 MTL-LCF GPROC2 GPROC2 or GPROC3 RSL-LCF GPROC2 GPROC2 or GPROC3 OMF GPROC2 GPROC2 or GPROC3 CSFP GPROC2 GPROC2 or GPROC3
NOTE
When the enhanced BSC capacity feature and AMR (and/or GSM half rate) are used together in GSR7, it is mandatory for a GPROC3 to be installed in the BSP slot at the BSC. Otherwise, replacing a GPROC2 with a GPROC3 in the BSP slot is at the discretion of the user.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-37
Version 1 Rev 3
BSC types
The BSC is configured as one of two types; the type is determined by the GPROCs present. BSC type 1 Master GPROC. Running the base site control processor (BSP) and carring out operations and maintenance functionalities. Link control processor (LCF). Running the radio signalling link (RSL) and layer 3 processing or MTL (C7 signalling link) communications links. BSC type 2 Master GPROC. Running the BSP. LCF. OMF. Running the O&M, including statistics collection, and OML link (X.25 control links to the OMC-R).
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the GPROC complement: BSP limitation. When the enhanced BSC capacity feature and AMR (and/or GSM Half Rate) are used together, it is mandatory to deploy GPROC3s in any potential BSP slot in the site, both active and standby (i.e., slot 20 and 24 in cage 0 and slot 20 in cage 1). Under other circumstances, replacing a GPROC2 with a GPROC3 in the BSP slot is at the discretion of the user. Each BSC requires: One master GPROC (BSP). One OMF (if it is a type 2 BSC). A number of LCFs for MTLs, see Link control processor below. LCFs to support the RSL and control of the BTSs.
7-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Optional GPROCs Include: One redundant master GPROC (BSP). At least one redundant pool GPROC (covers LCFs). An optional dedicated CSFP.
A maximum of eight GPROCs can be supported in a BSU shelf. The master GPROC slot (20) in the first shelf should always be populated to enable communication with the OMC-R. For redundancy each BSC should be equipped with a redundant BSP controller and an additional GPROC to provide redundancy for the signalling LCFs. Where multiple shelves exist, each shelf should have a minimum of two GPROCs to provide redundancy within that shelf. Link control function The following factors should be considered when planning the number of LCFs: MTLs are handled by dedicated LCFs. GPROCs can handle up to two MTLs. For RSL handling the maximum number of carriers that can be supported by an LCF depends on the number of BTSs controlled by that LCF. The sum of 2 x (the number of BTSs) and the number of carriers cannot exceed 120 for a GPROC LCF. NOTE There is a limit of 24 carriers in a single Horizon IImacro, Horizonmacro or M-Cell6 site.
A GPROC LCF can handle up to 500 messages per second. NOTE Combining MTL and RSL processing on a single GPROC is not recommended.
The planning rules for LCFs using GPROCs are: A single GPROC will support two MTLs each working at 20% link utilization. However, if the link utilisation is higher, the actual number of MTLs supported per LCF depends on the Erlangs supported per LCF and MTL for that particular call model. A single GPROC will support up to 31 BTS sites and 31 RSLs, limited to the following calculation:
Where carriers = the total number of radios for the BTS site(s).
Where nLCF = the number of TCHs on the sites under a LCF and n = the total number of sites on the LCF. If any LCF does not satisfy the above criteria, either rebalancing of sites on the available LCF GPROCs at the BSC is required or additional LCF GPROCs may need to be equipped at the BSC to handle the traffic load. The link utilization of a RSL should not exceed 25%. Up to 25 LCFs can be supported.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-39
Version 1 Rev 3
A maximum of 31 BTS sites can be controlled by a single LCF. All RSLs (LAPD links) for the BTSs will terminate on the same GPROC, so if return loops are used the maximum number of BTS sites will be 15 (if GPROC_slots = 31). If GPROC_slots is set to 16 then at most 15 RSLs may exist which would support up to seven BTS sites. NOTE The number of serial links per GPROC must be determined for each site. The current values are 16 or 32 with 16 being the default value. One link is reserved for each board (for GPROC test purposes) so the number of available serial links is either 15 or 31. However, when the links are running at high load, the GPROC may experience some performance problems when terminating 31 links. Hence, the use of more than 15 links per board is not recommended.
Where:
NGPROC2 B L C R
is:
the total number of GPROCs required. the number of BSP GPROCs (2B for redundancy). the number of LCF GPROCs. the number of CSFP GPROCs. the number of pool GPROCs (for redundancy).
NOTE
If dedicated GPROCs are required for either the CSFP or OMF functions then they should be provisioned separately.
7-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the total number of statistics. the number of enabled cell statistics the number of cells. the number of traffic enabled channel statistics. the number of traffic channels. the number of X.25/LAPD statistics. the number of RSLs. the number of OMLs. the number of XBLs
NOTE
The formula assumes that the same cell and channel statistics are enabled across all cells.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-41
Version 1 Rev 3
GPROC redundancy
BSP redundancy The failure of the BSP GPROC will cause a system outage. If the BSC is equipped with a redundant BSP GPROC, the system will restart under the control of the redundant BSP GPROCs. If the BSC is not equipped with a redundant BSP and the BSP GPROC were to fail, the BSC would be inoperable. Pooled GPROCs for LCF and OMF redundancy The BSS supports pooled GPROCs for LCF and OMF redundancy. By equipping additional GPROCs for spares, if an LCF or the OMF GPROC were to fail, the system software will automatically activate a spare GPROC2 from the GPROC pool to replace the failed GPROC.
7-42
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-43
Version 1 Rev 3
7-44
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
t1
t2
BTS 1 BTS 2 t3
BTS 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-45
Version 1 Rev 3
7-46
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-47
Version 1 Rev 3
Network Architecture
New network elements are required to support LCS in a GSM system as shown in figure 7-3. Gateway Mobile Location Centre (GMLC) This is the first node that a LCS client will access in a GSM PLMN. The GMLC may request routing information from the HLR via the Lh interface. After registration, the GMLC sends positioning requests to, and receives final location estimates from the MSC/VLR via the Lg interface. The GMLC is responsible for: Managing the external interface to LCS Authorising LCS clients requesting LCS information Collecting LCS charging/billing data for both clients and subscribers Transforming location estimates into local geographic data used by the client
7-48
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS Architecture
CBC SMLC
LMU (Type A)
CBC Lb
CBC BSC
Um MS
Abis
BSC
MSC/VLR Lg
Abis
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-49
Version 1 Rev 3
Serving Mobile Location Centre (SMLC) The SMLC manages the overall co-ordination and scheduling of resources required to perform location calculation. It is also responsible for calculating the final accuracy of location estimate. There are 2 types of SMLC: NSS based - supporting positioning of a target MS via signalling on the Ls interface to the visited MSC. BSS based - A BSS based SMLC supports position indication via signalling on the Lb link to the BSC serving the MS concerned. Both types of SMLC are able to access information and resources owned by another SMLC via the Lp interface. In general terms, a BSC only knows about the existence of a BSS based SMLC, if a SMLC is NSS based, all transactions will appear to be to and from the MSC only. The SMLC controls a number of LMUs to obtain radio interface measurements for MS subscriber location within the area it covers. NSS based SMLC to LMU signalling is transferred to the LMUs MSC via the Ls interface, and either the Um interface for a type A LMU or the Abis interface for a type B LMU. The signalling between a BSS based SMLC and LMU is transferred via the BSC controlling the LMU on the Lb interface and either the Um for a type A LMU or the Abis for a type B LMU. The GMLC and SMLC functions may be combined in the same physical node, combined in existing physical nodes, or reside in different nodes. If a BSC has a related CBC entity, the SMLC may interface to the CBC for broadcast facilities. In this case, the SMLC will behave as a user Cell Broadcast Entity to the CBC. Location Measurement Unit (LMU) The LMU make radio measurements in support of one or more positioning methods with these measurements being in one of two possible categories: Location measurements specific to one MS used to compute the location of it Assistance measurements specific to a group of MSs in a geographic area There are two types of LMU: Type A- Accessed exclusively over the GSM Air Interface. It has a serving BTS and BSC giving signalling access to a controlling SMLC. With a NSS based SMLC, there will also be a serving MSC/VLR and a subscription profile held in the HLR. Has a unique IMSI and has functionality enough to support SDCCH over the Air Interface to enable communication with the SMLC. Type B - Accessed over the Abis Interface from a BSC. May be either a stand-alone entity with a unique pseudo-cell identity or connected to/integrated with a BTS. Signalling is routed through the controlling BSC for a BSS based SMLC or through the controlling BSC and MSC for a NSS based SMLC.
7-50
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS Architecture
CBC SMLC
LMU (Type A)
CBC Lb
CBC BSC
Um MS
Abis
BSC
MSC/VLR Lg
Abis
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-51
Version 1 Rev 3
Transcoding
Transcoding
Introduction
Transcoding reduces the number of cellular subscriber voice/data trunks required by a factor of four. When AMR (or GSM) half rate is in use (and the 7.95 kbit/s half rate codec mode is not included in the Half Rate Active Codec Set and 8 kbit/s subrate switching is available) the reduction factor for the half rate calls becomes eight. Note that in most configurations half rate is likely used only for part of the time, thus yielding a reduction factor of less than eight. If transcoding takes place at the switch using a RXCDR, the number of links between the RXCDR and the BSC is reduced to approximately one quarter (less when half rate is employed under the conditions described above) of the number of links between the RXCDR and the MSC. The GDP2 can process 60 channels of FR, EFR, AMR, GSM HR and Phase 2 data services and is capable of terminating two E1 links from the MSC. It can also function as a replacement for the GDP. The capacity of one BSU shelf is 12 MSI slots, six of which may contain a transcoder (XCDR), generic digital processor (GDP), enhanced digital processor (EGDP), or generic digital processor 2 (GDP2); this limitation is due to power constraints. A RXU shelf can support up to 16 GDP/XCDR/EGDP/GDP2s and typically provides a better solution of the transcoding function for larger commercial systems. The GDP2 may be used to 60 channel capacity in the BSU shelf, and when used in the new RXU3 shelf and BSSC3 cabinet (within the RXCDR, enhanced capacity mode must be enabled to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in non-MSI slots). The existing RXU shelf has only one E1 per transcoder slot, therefore the GDP2 can not be used to its full capacity in the existing RXU shelf (the GDP2 supports only 30 channels when used in the RXU shelf). Refer to the section Remote transcoder planning overview in Chapter 9. An EGDP is a new development of the GDP board, used to support AMR. Due to the additional transcoding requirements of AMR, each of the 15 DSPs on the GDP board is only capable of supporting the transcoding function for a single channel of GSM speech (AMR, FR, and EFR) and Phase 2 data services. To fully offer 30 channels of enhanced transcoding using the same E1 span line to the MSC, enhanced GDPs are equipped as pairs, each providing half of the transcoding resources. Note that this results in an overall reduction in capacity - equivalent to 30 channels per GDP pair. Use of an EGDP is practical only when used in conjunction with AMR. The EGDP does not support GSM Half Rate. Due to the ability of the GDP2 to function as a GDP, it may replace one or both of the GDPs in the EGDP configuration. This is not an optimal use of the GDP2 and is most likely to occur in emergency situations (e.g. board replacement). As a result, it is not considered in the planning procedures. The MSC recommends a particular codec type or types to be used on a call-by-call basis. It sends the BSC a preference-ordered list, based on such factors as MS capabilities and operator configuration. When the MSC is capable of choosing the MSC--RXCDR trunk (CIC) based upon the preferred codec type, a mix of both AMR capable (EGDP/GDP2) and non-AMR capable (XCDR/GDP) equipment may be used. If this capability (called "circuit pooling") is not present, GDP2s or EGDPs should be used exclusively to prevent downgrading or blocking of calls. When AMR is employed and both XCDR/GDPs and EGDP/GDP2s are present (and circuit pooling is present at the MSC), there must be sufficient GDP2 and EGDP equipment available to handle the expected AMR traffic. The proportion of AMR capable transcoding circuits vs. non-AMR capable transcoding circuits should be no less than the proportion of AMR capable MSs vs. non-AMR capable MSs. A safety factor of no less than 20% is recommended (20% allows for some variation in the actual number and allows for a period of growth in AMR capable MS penetration before having to add more AMR transcoding ability). Note that each AMR half rate call requires one (AMR) transcoder circuit. Lack of an available AMR circuit could cause a call to be downgraded to another codec type or possibly blocked. When GSM half rate is employed and a mix of XCDRs and GDP/GDP2s are present, a similar situation exists. However, due to the early introduction into the standards of GSM half rate, most mobile are expected to be GSM half rate capable. Since a CIC is not tied to any particular voice channel, circuit pooling is rendered ineffective, as there is no way to predict which mobiles may require GSM half rate. It becomes necessary to update all transcoding to support GSM HR in order to guarantee GSM half rate can be used when needed. Without this upgrade, calls on non-GSM HR capable CICs will remain on a full rate channel.
7-52
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Transcoding
Version 1 Rev 3
When GSM half rate and AMR are both in use and a combination of AMR transcoding equipment (EGDP, GDP2) and GSM half rate transcoding equipment (GDP, GDP2) exist, circuit pooling is most effective when choosing AMR CICs (EGDP, GDP2) for AMR capable mobiles, and the remaining CICs for non-AMR capable mobiles. Ideally, for AMR capable mobiles the MSC would first choose a CIC attached to a EGDP, followed by one attached to a GDP2. For a non-AMR capable mobile the MSC would first choose a CIC attached to a GDP, followed by one attached to a GDP2. The selection of the proper CIC (circuit pool) is dependent upon the capability of the connected MSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-53
Version 1 Rev 3
Transcoding
T1 Conversion
T1 to E1 conversion is needed for XCDR, but not for GDP. EGDP and GDP2 do not support T1 connectivity. When required, MSI-2s can be used to provide T1 to E1 conversion. This can be done in one of two ways. In either case, the conversion may be part of an existing network element or a standalone network element which would appear as an RXCDR. Without KSW switching A single MSI-2 can be programmed to be E1 on one port and T1 on the other. This is the simplest method, but uses at most 23 of the transcoding circuits on the XCDR. This method has no impact on the TDM bus ports, but does require MSI slots. This method requires the number of GDP/XCDRs and additional MSI-2s to be equal to the number of T1 links. With KSW switching For better utilization of the GDP/XCDRs, a mapping of five T1 circuits onto four E1 circuits may be done. This uses the ability of the KSW to switch between groups using nailed connections. Although more efficient in XCDR utilization, this method may cause additional KSWs to be used. Each MSI-2 requires an MSI slot. The number of MSI-2s needed for T1 to E1 conversion is:
Where: m T E
is: the number of MSI-2s required for T1 to E1 conversion. the number of T1 circuits required. the number of E1 circuits required.
7-54
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Transcoding
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-55
Version 1 Rev 3
Primary GDP
A Primary GDP can provide E1/T1 interface to the MSC. It can support basic transcoding as a stand-alone board or be paired with a Secondary GDP to provide enhanced transcoding. Secondary GDP A Secondary GDP provides enhanced transcoding for 50% of circuits interfaced from the MSC by a Primary GDP. The Secondary GDP can also be used to provide E1/T1 interface to a BSC or BTS in place of an MSI board. The first of the following 2 diagrams shows a GDP pair used for enhanced transcoding of 30 TCHs at either a RXCDR or BSC using an MSI for Ater/Abis link interface. The second diagram shows the GDP pair utilising both E1/T1 interfaces to replace an MSI. If a secondary GDP fails, the CIC for which it provides a service will become Out-Of- Service.
7-56
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MSC
E1
Primary GDP
15 DSPs
RXCDR or BSC
TDM Highway
MSI
E1
64Kbit/s 16Kbit/s
SYS04_GSR7_ch8p8-51
BSC Or BTS
MSC
E1
Primary GDP
15 DSPs
RXCDR or BSC
TDM Highway
64Kbit/s 16Kbit/s
SYS04_GSR7_ch8_p8-51b
BSC Or BTS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-57
Version 1 Rev 3
7-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
N C X T
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required. the number of MTL links (C7 signalling links) to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC-R) through the MSC. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC.
Each XCDR/GDP/EGDP can terminate one E1 link. Each GDP2 can terminate two E1 links (when used in a BSU or RXU3 shelf (enhanced capacity mode must be enabled within the RXCDR to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in non-MSI slots)). The equipment can be mixed within the following calculation:
Where:
N XGE G2
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required. tthe number of XCDR/GDP/EGDPs. the number of GDP2s.
Verify that the number of AMR circuits is sufficient to handle the expected AMR traffic. If necessary, adjust the number of EGDP/GDP2s. The following formula may be used to determine the percentage of AMR capable circuits:
NOTE
Count primary and secondary EGDPs as one EGDP in the above equation.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-59
Version 1 Rev 3
Using T1 links The minimum number of T1 links required for the A-Interface is the greater of two calculations that follow (fractional values should be rounded up to the next integer value).
Where:
N C X T
is:
the minimum number of T1 links required. the number of MTL links (C7 signalling links) to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC-R) through the MSC. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC.
Each GDP card can erminate one T1 link (see T1 conversion above for XCDR)
7-60
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the transcoder complement: Each MSI can interface two E1 links. Each MSI-2 can interface two T1 links. NOTE Although the MSI-2 is configurable to support either E1 or T1 on each of its two ports, it is not recommended for E1 systems.
Each E1 link provides 31 usable 64 kbit/s channels. Each T1 link provides 24 usable 64 kbit/s channels, T1 links use MSI-2. Redundancy for the MSI/MSI-2 depends on the provisioning of redundant E1/T1 links connected to the site. The master MSI slot(s) should always be populated to enable communication with OMC-R. If the OML links go directly to the MSC, the master slot should be filled with a XCDR/GDP/EGDP (primary or secondary)/GDP2, otherwise the slot should be filled with an MSI/MSI-2 which terminates the E1/T1 link carrying the OML link to the OMC-R. These E1/T1 links do not need to go directly to the OMC-R, they may go to another network element for concentration.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-61
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
M B
is:
Where:
M B m
is:
the number of MSI/MSI-2s required. the number of BSC to BTS links. the number of MSI/MSI-2s used for T1 to E1 conversion.
7-62
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the KSW/DSW2 complement: A minimum of one KSW/DSW2 is required for each BSC site. The KSW/DSW2 capacity of 1024 x 64 kbit/s or 4096 x 16 kbit/s ports can be expanded by adding up to three additional KSWs/DSW2s, giving a total switching capacity of 4096 x 64 kbit/s or 16384 x 16 kbit/s ports. When operating in extended subrate switching mode, the DSW2 can switch an additional 16384 x 8 kbit/s ports. Eight (64 kbit/s) timeslots per KSW/DSW2 are reserved by the system for test purposes and are not available for use. A mix of KSWs and DSW2s requires that the DSW2s are operated in the 16 kbit/s switching mode only. Note that enhanced capacity mode is only available at the RXCDR (not the BSC). Using 12 MSIs per KSW/DSW2 may reduce the number of shelves required at a cost of additional KSWs/DSW2s. For example, a BSC with 28 MSIs could be housed in three shelves with three KSW/DSW2 modules, or four shelves with two KSW/DSW2 modules. All configurations are dependent upon timeslot usage, as described below. For redundancy, duplicate all KSWs/DSW2s. In mixed configurations (KSWs and DSW2s), KSWs can be redundant to DSW2s and vice-versa. Verify that each KSW/DSW2 uses no more than 1016 ports. The devices in a BSC that require TDM timeslots are: GPROC1 = 16 Timeslots. GPROC2 or GPROC3 = 32 (or 16) timeslots. GDP or XCDR (or GDP2 acting as a GDP replacement) = 16 timeslots. EGDP = 80 timeslots. GDP2 = 24 timeslots. MSI/MSI-2 = 64 timeslots.
There is one additional consideration with regard to timeslot usage which is relates to the timeslot allocation policy employed. Timeslots are grouped in 32 blocks of 32 timeslots each. Generally, groups of 16 (the first 16 or last 16) can be allocated within a block. However, the GDP2 is a special case as it requires 24 timeslots, a group of 16 and another 8 out of an additional block. The remaining 8 timeslots (within the block of 16) can only be used by another GDP2. Hence, if there is an odd number of GDP2s then 8 timeslots will be unusable. As each device requires at a minimum 16 timeslots, this does not have any significant effect on timeslot planning. The number of TDM timeslots is given by:
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-63
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the number of timeslots required. the number of GPROCs. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the gproc_slots database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs. the number of EGDPs. the number of GDP2s. the number of MSI/MSI-2s (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on board E1 to T1 conversion, when determining TDM bandwidth).
NOTE
Any BSC site which contains a DRIM has 352 timeslots allocated to DRIMs irrespective of the number of DRIMs equipped.
7-64
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the number of KSWs required. the number of GPROC2s. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the GPROC_slot database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs. the number of EGDPs. the number of GDP2s. the number of MSI/MSI-2s (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on-board T1 conversion)
Each KSW/DSW2 has to serve the boards in its shelf plus the boards of any extension shelf connected to its shelf by its TDM highway of 1016 available timeslots. In case of multiple expansion shelves, the TDM highways of each shelf do not merge into a common unique TDM highway across all shelves. That is, a KSW/DSW2 in one cage cannot serve boards in other expansion shelves. For example, in the case of a BSC consisting of two shelves each having 32 unused timeslots per KSW/DSW2 free, an additional MSI board CANNOT be added even if a MSI slot is free at each shelf, (but one GPROC per shelf can be added if one GPROC slot per shelf is free).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-65
Version 1 Rev 3
BSU shelves
BSU shelves
Introduction
The number of BSU shelves is normally a function of the number of GPROCs, MSI/MSI-2s and XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s required.
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the number of BSU shelves: Each BSU shelf supports up to eight GPROCs, if the number of these exceed the number of slots available an additional BSU shelf is required. Each expansion shelf is allocated to a single KSW/DSW2 and extension shelves are differentiated by the presence of the KSW/DSW2. Extension shelves are those which do not contain a primary KSW/DSW2. Shelves containing a KSW/DSW2 are called expansion shelves. An extension shelf extends the TDM highway. It is constrained to the same number (aggregate) timeslots as the shelf containing the KSW/DSW2. An expansion shelf adds another TDM highway. It increases the number of timeslots to that of the additional KSW/DSW2. The following capacities depend on timeslot usage. See Kiloport switch (KSW) and Double Kiloport Switch (DSW2) for information on how to determine timeslot usage. A BSU shelf can support up to 12 MSI/MSI-2 boards. A BSU shelf can support up to six XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s boards. (reducing appropriately, the number of MSI/MSI-2 boards). NOTE For EDGPs, both the primary and secondary must be counted.
7-66
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
BSU shelves
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
Bs G M R
is:
the minimum number of BSU shelves required. the number of GPROCs. the number of MSI/MSI-2s. the number of XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s see note below).
NOTE
For EGDPs, both the primary and the secondary must be counted.
The number of timeslots equipped to each shelf must be verified. This verification procedure is similar to the one included in the KSW/DSW2 planning considerations section of this chapter (the KSW/DSW2 timeslot validation will prevent a shelf from exceeding the timeslot limit) and is repeated here for completeness.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-67
Version 1 Rev 3
BSU shelves
Where:
is:
the number of GPROC2s. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the GPROC_slot database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs in the shelf. the number of EGDPs in the shelf. the number of GDP2s in the shelf. the number of MSI/MSI-2s in the shelf (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on-board T1 conversion)
If the result of the above equation exceeds 1016, the configuration of MSIs, GPROCs and GDPs may be adjusted, or an additional cage or cages may be required. NOTE The number of shelves may be larger if an attempt to reduce the number of KSWs/DSW2s is made. The maximum number of shelves (cages) at a site = 8. The maximum number of cabinets at a site = 8. Horizon and M-Cell sites do not require a cage to be equipped, only a cabinet.
7-68
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Version 1 Rev 3
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Introduction
The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) extends the TDM highway of a BSU to other BSUs and supplies clock signals to all shelves in multi-shelf configurations. The KSWX is required whenever a network element grows beyond a single shelf. The DSWX performs the same function as the KSWX when used in the BSU.
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the KSWX/DSWX complement: KSWXs/DSWXs are not required in a single shelf configuration (that is, when expansion or extension is not required). For redundancy, duplicate all KSWX/DSWX boards (requires redundant KSW/DSW2). In mixed configurations (KSWXs and DSWXs), KSWXs can be redundant to DSWXs and vice-versa. KSWXs/DSWXs are used in three modes: KSWX/DSWXE (Expansion) are required to interconnect the KSWs/DSW2s for sites with multiple KSWs/DSW2s. KSWX/DSWXR (Remote) are required in shelves with KSWs/DSW2s to drive the TDM highway in shelves that do not have KSWs/DSW2s. KSWX/DSWXL (Local) are used in shelves that have KSWs/DSW2s to drive the clock bus in that shelf and in shelves that do not have KSWs/DSW2s to drive both the local TDM highway and the clock bus in that shelf.
Five of the redundant KSWX/DSWX slots are also CLKX slots. The maximum number of KSWX/DSWX slots per shelf is 18, nine per KSW/DSW2. KSWXs and DSWXs may both be used, however they should always be used with like pairs, i.e. DSWXs with DSWXs and KSWXs with KSWXs.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-69
Version 1 Rev 3
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Where:
is:
the number of KSWX/DSWXs required. the number of KSWX/DSWXE. the number of KSWX/DSWXR. the number of KSWX/DSWXL. the number of non-redundant KSW/DSW2s. the number of extension/expansion shelves.
7-70
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Version 1 Rev 3
Extension shelves
Table 7-11
Extension shelves 0 1 2 3 4 0 6 10 14 18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-71
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the GCLK complement: One GCLK is required at each BSC. The maximum number of GCLK slots per shelf is two. For redundancy add a second GCLK at each site in the same cabinet as the first GCLK.
7-72
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the CLKX complement: One CLKX is required in the first BSU shelf, which contains the GCLK, when expansion beyond the shelf occurs. Each CLKX can supply the GCLK signals to six shelves. There are three CLKX slots for each GCLK, allowing each GCLK to support up to 18 shelves (LAN extension only allows fourteen shelves in a single network element). The maximum number of CLKX slots per shelf is six. NOTE The CLKX uses six of the redundant KSWX slots. With a CLKX, a KSWX/DSWXL is required to distribute the clocks in the master and each of the expansion/extension cages. For redundancy, duplicate each CLKX (requires a redundant GCLK).
Where:
NCLKX ROUND UP E RF
is:
the number of CLKX required. rounding up to the next integer. the number of expansion/expension shelves. Redundancy factor (1 if redundancy required (recommended). 0 for no redundancy).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-73
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the LANX complement: One LANX is supplied in each shelf. For full redundancy add one LANX for each shelf. The LANX can support a maximum network size of 14 shelves.
Where:
NLANX NBSU RF
is:
the number of LANX required. the number of BSU shelves. Redundancy factor (1 if redundancy required (recommended). 0 for no redundancy).
BSU 14
7-74
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the PIX complement: The maximum number of PIX board slots per shelf is two. The maximum number of PIX board slots per site is eight.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-75
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the line interface complement: To match a balanced 120 ohm (E1 2.048 Mbit/s) or balanced 110 ohm (T1 1.544 Mbit/s) 3 V (peak pulse) line use a BIB. To match a single ended unbalanced 75 ohm (E1 2.048 Mbit/s) 2.37 V (peak pulse) line use a T43 Board (T43). Each BIB/T43 can interface six E1/T1 links to specific slots on one shelf. Up to four BIBs or T43s per shelf can be mounted on a BSSC2 cabinet A maximum of 24 E1/T1 links can be connected to a BSU shelf. A BSSC2 cabinet with two BSU shelves can interface 48 E1/T1 links. NOTE A BSSC3 cabinet can have up to seven BIBs or T43s per shelf mounted, but in the BSU configuration this additional connectivity is not needed.
7-76
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the PSU complement: Two DPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC. Two IPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC2 (-48/-60 V dc). Two IPSM2s are required for each shelf in the BSSC3 (--48 V/--60 V dc). Two EPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC2 (+27 V dc). For redundancy, add one DPSM, IPSM or EPSM for each shelf.
Where:
RF
is:
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-77
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the BBBX complement: One BBBX is required per shelf; if the battery backup option is to be used.
7-78
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning Considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the NVM complement: Only one NVM board can be installed at the BSC. The NVM board uses slot 26 in the BSU cage 0 (master) of the BSC, which is an unused slot. The appropriate software required to support the NVM board must be loaded at the OMC-R and downloaded to the BSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
7-79
Version 1 Rev 3
12 * number of shelves. The number of XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s 6 * number of shelves. NOTE For the above two calculations, the EGDP consists of a primary and a secondary, counting as two boards.
The number of BTS sites 100 The number of BTS cells 250 RSLs. 250 Carriers. 384 LCFs. 25 Erlangs. 3000 If necessary, add extra BSU shelves. Each BSSC2 cabinet supports two BSU shelves.
7-80
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-1
Version 1 Rev 3
8-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Define the steps for the planning of the RXCDR. Explain the impact on RXCDR planning of the 2G-3G handover feature. Determine the signalling link requirments for a RXCDR. Determine the digital card requirments for a RXCDR. Give a brief description of the RXCDR digital cards and their functions.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
Chapter overview
Introduction
This chapter provides the planning steps and rules for the RXCDR. This chapter contains: RXCDR planning overview. RXCDR planning. Planning rules for RXCDR to BSC links. Planning rules for RXCDR to MSC links. Planning rules for the digital modules. Planning rules for the digital shelf power supply.
8-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-5
Version 1 Rev 3
8-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Introduction
Introduction
Transcoders (XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s) provide the interface for the E1 (or converted T1) links between the MSC and the BSC. The XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s performs the transcoding/rate adaptation function which compresses the information on the trunks by a factor of four (16 kbit/s). When AMR or GSM HR half rate is in use (and the 7.95 kbit/s half rate codec mode is not included in the Half Rate Active Codec Set and 8 kbit/s subrate switching is enabled), the reduction factor becomes eight (8 kbit/s). Note that in most configurations, half rate is likely used only a part of the time, thus yielding a reduction factor of less than eight. The number of links between the RXCDR and the BSC is reduced to approximately one quarter (less when half rate is employed under the conditions described above) of the number of links between the RXCDR and the MSC. The GDP2 can process 60 channels of FR, EFR, AMR, GSM HR and Phase 2 data services and is capable of terminating two E1 links from the MSC. It can also function as a replacement for the GDP. Within the RXCDR, enhanced capacity mode must be enabled to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in non-MSI slots. An EGDP is a new configuration of the GDP board used to support AMR. Due to the additional transcoding requirements of AMR, each of the 15 DSPs on the GDP board is only capable of supporting transcoding function for a single channel of GSM speech (AMR, FR, and EFR) and Phase 2 data services. To fully offer 30 channels of enhanced transcoding using the same E1 span line to the MSC, EGDPs are equipped as pairs, each providing half of the transcoding resources. Note that this results in an overall reduction in transcoding cage capacity - equivalent to 30 channels per GDP pair. Use of an EGDP is practical only when used in conjunction with AMR. The EGDP does not support GSM HR. Due to the ability of the GDP2 to function as a GDP, it may replace one or both of the GDPs in the EGDP configuration. This is not an optimal use of the GDP2 and is most likely to occur in emergency situations (e.g. board replacement). As a result, it is not considered in the planning procedures. The MSC recommends a particular codec type or types to be used on a call by call basis. It sends the BSC a preference-ordered list, based on such factors as MS capabilities and operator configuration. When the MSC is capable of choosing the MSC--RXCDR trunk (CIC) based upon the preferred codec type, a mix of both AMR-capable (EGDP/GDP2) and non AMR-capable (XCDR/GDP) equipment may be used. If this capability (called "circuit pooling") is not present, GDP2s or EGDPs should be used exclusively to prevent downgrading or blocking of calls. When AMR is employed and both XCDR/GDPs and EGDP/GDP2s are present (and circuit pooling is present at the MSC), there must be sufficient GDP2 and EGDP equipment available to handle the expected AMR traffic. The proportion of AMR-capable transcoding circuits vs. non AMR-capable transcoding circuits should be no less than the proportion of AMR-capable MSs vs. non AMR-capable MSs. A safety factor of no less than 20% is recommended (20% allows for some variation in the actual number and allows for a period of growth in AMR-capable MS penetration before having to add more AMR transcoding ability). Note that each AMR half rate call requires one (AMR) transcoder circuit. Lack of an available AMR circuit could cause a call to be downgraded to another codec type or possibly blocked. When GSM half rate is employed and a mix of XCDRs and GDP/GDP2s are present, a similar situation exists. However, due to the early introduction into the standards of GSM half rate, most mobile are expected to be GSM half rate capable. Since a CIC is not tied to any particular voice channel, circuit pooling is rendered ineffective, as there is no way to predict which mobiles may require GSM half rate. It becomes necessary to update all transcoding to support GSM HR in order to guarantee GSM half rate can be used when needed. Without this upgrade, calls on non-GSM HR capable CICs will remain on a full rate channel. When GSM half rate and AMR are both in use and a combination of AMR transcoding equipment (EGDP, GDP2) and GSM half rate transcoding equipment (GDP, GDP2) exist, circuit pooling is most effective when choosing AMR CICs (EGDP, GDP2) for AMR capable mobiles, and the remaining CICs for non-AMR capable mobiles. Ideally, for AMR capable mobiles the MSC would first choose a CIC attached to a EGDP, followed by one attached to a GDP2. For a non-AMR capable mobile the MSC would first choose a CIC attached to a GDP, followed by one attached to a GDP2. The selection of the proper CIC (circuit pool) is dependent upon the capability of the connected MSC.
8-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Introduction
Version 1 Rev 3
Transcoding
Figure 8-1 below shows sub-multiplexing and speech transcoding at the RXCDR. Each Trunk requires a quarter (1/4th) of a 64 kbit/s circuit between the RXCDR and BSC. (1/8th in certain AMR Half-rate as described in the following pages) Each control link (RSL, OML,XBL,C7) requires one 64 kbit/s circuit. (RSL and XBL have the option of using 16 kbit/s circuits)
Figure 8-1
RXCDR M S C X K M C S S D W I / R M S I 2
BSC M S I / M S I 2 K S W M S I / M S I 2
M-CELL BTS N I U M C U T C U
One RF carrier
64 kbit/s 4 TCHs
The XCDR transcodes 64 kbit/s A-law PCM to/from 13 kbit/s mapped onto 16 kbit/s, and submultiplexes 4 trunks to/from 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit
The KSW subrate 8 x 22.8 kbit/s switches 16 kbit/s timeslots timeslots The TCU encodes/decodes 13 kbit/s to/from 22.8 kbit/s for 8 timeslots, and submultiplexes 4 (13 kbit/s mapped on 16 kbit/s) timeslots onto 1 x 64 kbit/s circuit, or the other way around
NOTE
In Figure 8-1, the CTU2 is shown operating in single density mode (one carrier), although it can also operate in double density mode (two carriers).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-9
Version 1 Rev 3
Capacity
Each BSC may connect to up to ten RXCDRs, and vice-versa. The level of connectivity may be constrained by the number of XBLs that can be supported; there is a limit of 20 at each BSC and RXCDR (see Determining the number of XBLs required in Chapter 8). The level of connectivity is determined by the operator, Excess RXCDR capacity should not be wasted, nor should larger BSCs be connected only to one RXCDR. One guideline is to have each BSC connect to four RXCDRs. System size, capacity, and cost are major influences on the chosen configuration. With the introduction of advanced transcoding capabilities (i.e. AMR), care should be taken when distributing the functions across multiple RXCDRs. For optimum redundancy, each RXCDR should have an appropriate mix of transcoder capability. For example, in a four BSC, four RXCDR configuration where all are interconnected and there are a limited number of transcoder cards capable of AMR (e.g. GDP2s), optimally the cards would be distributed equally amongst the RXCDRs.
8-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-11
Version 1 Rev 3
8-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
This text should be read in conjunction with the BSS planning diagram, Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2
MSC TRANSCODER
WITH SUBMULTIPLEXING TRANSCODING AT MSC 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/C7 SIGNALLING LINK 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/X.25 SIGNALLING LINK* 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/ XBL 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/4 TRUNKS 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/8 TRUNKS (AMR HALF RATE WITH 8kbit/s MULTIPLEXING ENABLED) WITHOUT SUBMULTIPLEXING TRANSCODING AT MSC 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/C7 SIGNALLING LINK 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/X.25 SIGNALLING LINK* 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/TRUNK
A INTERFACE (TERRESTRIAL LINKS) C7 SIGNALLING LINKS X.25 CONTROL LINK* REQUIRED TRUNKS
THE BSC TO MSC 64 kbit/s CIRCUITS ARE DETERMINED FROM THE # OF TRUNKS REQUIRED TO CARRY THE SUMMATION OF AIR INTERFACE TRAFFIC (IN ERLANGS, TYPICALLY USING 1% BLOCKING) FROM ALL BTSs PLUS THE # OF C7 SIGNALLING LINKS PLUS (IF APPLICABLE*) THE # OF X.25 LINKS (USUALLY ONE PER BSC) PLUS THE # OF XBL LINKS BSC
MOTOROLA BSC/BTS INTERFACE NON-BLOCKING 1 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUIT/LAPD SIGNALLING LINK 2 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUITS/DRCU/SCU 4 x 64 kbit/s CIRCUITS/RTF (SEE NOTE)
THE # OF TCHs REQUIRED (USING TYPICALLY 2% BLOCKING) TO CARRY SUBSCRIBER TRAFFIC THE TCHs PLUS THE REQUIRED SIGNALLING TSs DIVIDED BY EIGHT (OR 16 WITH AMR HALFDATE) DETERMINES THE CARRIERS REQUIRED (ON A BTS/SECTOR BASIS) BTS
AIR INTERFACE TCHs AND SIGNALLING TSs TYPICALLY 2% BLOCKING
TRANSCODING MUST BE LOCATED AT THE BSC, OR BETWEEN THE BSC AND MSC TCH TS * = TRAFFIC CHANNEL = TIMESLOT X.25 MAY BE PASSED TO RXCDR OR MSC SITE
USING TRAFFIC, TO DETERMINE E1/T1 LINK INTERCONNECT HARDWARE FOR THE `A' AND `BSC TO BTS' INTERFACE.
NOTE
4 X 64 kbit/s circuits/RTF for an AMR HR RTF and 8 kbit/s switching is not provisioned, or the 7.95 kbit/s HR codec mode is included in the HR active codec set.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-13
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required. the number of C7 signalling links to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC) through the RXCDR. the number of 64 kbit/s XBL links. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC. the percentage in decimal (e.g. 0.35) of expected half-rate usage. the number of 16 kbit/s XBL links.
NOTE
Each E1 link carries up to 120 (240 at half rate) trunks with a signalling link or 124 (248 at half rate) trunks without a signalling link. Note that the half rate numbers are only possible with all calls using half rate. Redundant E1 links carrying extra trunks may be added.
Where:
N C X B64 T B16
is:
the minimum number of T1 links required. the number of C7 signalling links to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC) through the RXCDR. the number of 64 kbit/s XBL links. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC. the number of 16 kbit/s XBL links.
NOTE
Each T1 link carries up to 92 trunks with a signalling link or 96 trunks without a signalling link. Redundant T1 links carrying extra trunks may be added.
8-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
N C X T
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required. the number of MTL links (C7 signalling links) to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC) through the MSC. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC.
Where:
N C X T
is:
the minimum number of T1 links required. the number of MTL links (C7 signalling links) to the MSC. the number of OML links (X.25 control links to the OMC) through the MSC. the number of trunks between the MSC and the BSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Introduction
Generic processors (GPROC, GPROC2) are used throughout the Motorola BSS as a generic control processor.
Planning considerations
The following factors, for GPROCs at the RXCDR, should be considered when planning the GPROC complement: Each shelf requires at least one GPROC board, plus one for redundancy. A maximum of two GPROCs per shelf are supported. NOTE GPROC1s may be used in a transcoder prior to GSR6 if the maximum number of BSCs connected to it does not exceed 5. GPROC2s must be used for higher connectivity (up to 10 BSCs). For GSR6 and GSR6 (Horizon II), GPROC2s are mandatory in the master and standby BSP slots in cage 0. From GSR7 onwards, GPROC3s can replace GPROC2s in the BSP slots. A GPROC3 can provide redundancy for a GPROC2 and vice-versa.
8-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-17
Version 1 Rev 3
T1 conversion
T1 conversion
T1 to E1 conversion is needed for XCDR, but not for GDP. The EGDP and GDP2 do not support T1 connectivity. When required MSI-2s can be used to provide T1 to E1 conversion. This can be done in one of two ways. In either case the conversion may be part of an existing network element or a standalone network element which would appear as a RXCDR.
Where:
m T E
is:
the number of MSI-2s required for T1 to E1 conversion. the number of T1 circuits required. the number of E1 circuits required.
8-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
T1 conversion
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
NRXCDR-MSC XGE G2
is:
the minimum number of E1 links required (as N is calculated in RXCDR to MSC links earlier in this chapter). the number of XCDRs, EDGPs and GDPs. the number of GDP2s.
Verify that the number of AMR circuits is sufficient to handle the expected AMR traffic. If necessary adjust the number of EGDP/GDP2s. The following formula may be used to determine the percentage of AMR-capable circuits:
In the above equation, count the primary and secondary EGDPs as one EGDP.
Each GDP card can terminate one T1 link. See T1 conversion (described previously) for XCDR.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-19
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the transcoder complement: Each MSI can interface two E1 links. Each MSI-2 can interface two E1/T1 links. NOTE Although the MSI-2 is configurable to support either E1 or T1 on each of its two ports, it is not recommended for E1 systems.
Each E1 link provides 31 usable 64 kbit/s channels. Each T1 link provides 24 usable 64 kbit/s channels, T1 links use MSI-2. Redundancy for the MSI/MSI-2 depends on the provisioning of redundant E1/T1 links connected to the site. When one remote transcoder site is supporting multiple BSCs, each BSC requires its own E1 interface(s) as follows: The number of MSI/MSI-2s should be equal to half the number of RXCDR to BSC E1 or T1 links. Redundancy requires additional links and MSI/MSI-2s. If the OMLs (X.25 links) do not go through the MSC, a dedicated E1 or T1 link (half an MSI/MSI-2) is required for the X.25 links to the OMC. At least one MSI/MSI-2 is required for every eight GDP/XCDR modules. Additional MSI/MSI-2s will be used if the links are not fully occupied. If the XCDR is using all 30 ports in a T1 network, use one MSI-2 for approximately every ten GDPs. Additional E1 or T1 links may be required to concentrate X.25 links from other network entities. Each BSC may use one to four 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s channels for XBL fault management communications. Reference should be made to Technical Description: BSS/RXCDR (GSM-100-323A) or Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR (GSM-100-030) for more details.
The master MSI slot(s) should always be populated to enable communication with OMC-R. If the OML links go directly to the MSC, the master slot should be filled with an XCDR/GDP/EGDP, otherwise the slot should be filled with an MSI/MSI-2 which terminates the E1/T1 link caring the OML link to the OMC-R. These E1/T1 links do not need to go directly to the OMC-R, they may go to another network element for concentration.
8-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
NMSI NBSC
is:
the number of MSIs required. the number of E1 links required. (as N calculated in RXCDR to BSC links in this chapter)
With T1 links If MSI-2s are used, T1 to E1 conversion is not needed. Therefore the number of MSI-2s required is:
Where:
NMSI NBSC
is:
the number of MSIs required. the number of E1 links required. (as N calculated in RXCDR to BSC links in this chapter)
If MSIs are used, conversion becomes necessary. Therefore the number of MSIs required is:
Where:
NMSI NBSC m
is:
the number of MSIs required. the number of E1 links required. (as N calculated in RXCDR to BSC links in this chapter) the number of MSI-2s used for T1 to E1 conversion.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-21
Version 1 Rev 3
8-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the KSW/DSW2 complement: A minimum of one KSWDSW2 is required for each RXU site. The KSW, or DSW2 not in enhanced capacity mode, has a capacity of 1024 x 64 kbit/s ports or 4096 x 16 kbit/s ports, which can be expanded by adding up to three additional KSW/DSW2s, giving a total switching capacity of 4096 x 64 kbit/s ports or 16384 x 16 kbit/s ports. When operating in enhanced capacity mode, the DSW2 has a capacity of 2048 x 64 kbit/s ports or 8196 x 16 kbit/s ports, which can be expanded by adding up to three additional DSW2s, giving a total switching capacity of 8192 x 64 kbit/s ports or 32768 x 16 kbit/s ports. When operating in extended subrate switching mode (but not enhanced capacity mode), the DSW2 can further switch 8192 x 8 kbit/s ports which can be expanded by adding up to three additional DSW2s, giving a total switching capacity of 32768 x 8 kbits/s ports. When operating in extended subrate switching mode and enhanced capacity mode, the DSW2 can further switch 16384 x 8 kbit/s ports which can be expanded by adding up to three additional DSW2s, giving a total switching capacity of 65536 x 8 kbits/s ports. Eight (64 kbit/s) timeslots per KSW/DSW2 are reserved by the system for test purposes and are not available for use. A mix of KSWs and DSW2s requires that the DSW2s are not operated in the enhanced capacity mode. For redundancy, duplicate all KSWs/DSW2s. In mixed configurations (KSWs and DSW2s), KSWs can be redundant to DSW2s and vice-versa. Verify that each KSW or DSW2 not in enhanced capacity mode uses no more than 1016 ports, or that each DSW2 in enhanced capacity mode uses no more than 2040 ports. The devices in a RXCDR that require TDM timeslots are: GPROC = 16 Timeslots. GPROC2 = 32 (or 16) Timeslots. GDP or XCDR (or GDP2 acting as a GDP replacement) = 16 timeslots. EGDP = 80 timeslots. GDP2 = 24 timeslots. MSI/MSI-2 = 64 Timeslots.
Where:
is:
the number of timeslots required. the number of GPROCs. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the gproc_slots database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs. the number of EGDPs. the number of GDP2s. the number of MSI/MSI-2s (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on board E1 to T1 conversion, when determining TDM bandwidth).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
is:
the number of timeslots required. the number of GPROCs. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the gproc_slots database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs. the number of EGDPs. the number of GDP2s. the number of MSI/MSI-2s (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on board E1 to T1 conversion, when determining TDM bandwidth).
Each KSW/DSW2 has to serve the boards in its shelf plus the boards of any extension shelf connected to its shelf by its TDM highway of 1016 available timeslots (or 2040 when operating in enhanced capacity mode). In case of multiple expansion shelves, the TDM highways of each shelf do not merge into a common unique TDM highway across all shelves. That is, a KSW/DSW2 in one cage cannot serve boards in other expansion shelves. For example, in the case of a RXCDR consisting of two shelves each having 32 unused timeslots per KSW/DSW2 free, an additional MSI board CANNOT be added even if a MSI slot is free at each shelf, (but one GPROC per shelf can be added if one GPROC slot per shelf is free).
8-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RXU shelves
Version 1 Rev 3
RXU shelves
Introduction
The number of RXU shelves is normally a function of the number of MSI/MSI2s and XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s required.
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the number of RXU shelves: Each expansion shelf is allocated to a single KSW/DSW2 and shelves are differentiated by the presence of the KSW/DSW2. Extension shelves are those which do not contain a primary KSW/DSW2. Shelves containing a KSW/DSW2 are called expansion shelves. An extension shelf extends the TDM highway. It is constrained to the same number of (aggregate) timeslots as the shelf containing the KSW/DSW2. An expansion shelf adds an additional TDM highway. It increases the number of timeslots to that of the additional KSW/DSW2. The number of devices that can be served by a KSW/DSW2 is governed by the TDM timeslot allocation required for each device. This is discussed previously in the KSW/DSW2 planning considerations. The number and type of shelves can then be determined from the devices required. For example: Two shelves, each equipped with three MSI/MSI-2s and 16 GDP/XCDRs, can be served by a single KSW. If each shelf has five MSI/MSI-2s with 14 GDP/XCDRs, the KSW can serve only one shelf, and two KSWs will be required. The existing RXU shelf has connectivity for up to five MSI/MSI-2s (2 x E1 connections). The remaining 14 slots have one E1 connection. All slots may be used for XCDR/GDP/EGDP (primary or secondary)/GDP2s. The RXU3 shelf has connectivity for two E1s per slot. All slots may be used for XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s and MSI/MSI-2s. The GDP2 can be used to terminate 2 x E1s, (i.e. 60 voice channels) only in the RXU3 shelf and BSSC3 cabinet (enhanced capacity mode must be enabled to access the second E1 when GDP2s are used in non-MSI slots). The current RXU shelf has only one E1 (T1) per transcoder slot, and the current BSSC2 cabinet does not have space for additional line interface boards. The GDP2 supports only 30 channels when used in the RXU shelf and/or BSSC2 cabinet. An NVM board cannot be installed if all the XCDR slots in the RXU cage 0 (master) are required.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-25
Version 1 Rev 3
RXU shelves
Where:
Rx Rx3 M R NNVM
is:
the minimum number of RXU shelves required. the minimum number of RXU3 shelves required. the number of MSI/MSI-2s. the number of XCDR/GDP/EGDP/GDP2s (see note). the number of optional NVM boards (0 or 1).
NOTE
For EGDPs, both the primary and the secondary must be counted.
The number of timeslots equipped to each shelf must be verified. Use the appropriate equation given below to do this. When enhanced capacity mode is not enabled: This verification procedure is similar to the one included in the KSW/DSW2 planning considerations section of chapter 8 (the KSW/DSW2 timeslot validation will prevent a shelf from exceeding the timeslot limit) and is repeated here for completeness.
Where:
is:
the number of GPROC2s. 16 or 32 (depending on the value of the GPROC_slot database parameter). the number of GDP/XCDRs in the shelf. the number of EGDPs in the shelf. the number of GDP2s in the shelf. the number of MSI/MSI-2s in the shelf (do not count MSI-2s which are doing on-board T1 conversion)
8-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RXU shelves
Version 1 Rev 3
If the result of using the appropriate equation above exceeds the value quoted, the configuration of MSIs, GPROCs and GDPs may be adjusted, or an additional cage or cages may be required.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-27
Version 1 Rev 3
RXU shelves
8-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Version 1 Rev 3
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Introduction
The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) extends the TDM highway of a RXU to other RXUs and supplies clock signals to all shelves in multi-shelf configurations. The KSWX is required whenever a network element grows beyond a single shelf. The DSWX performs the same function as the KSWX. It is necessary when enhanced capacity mode (2048 timeslot capability) is used.
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the KSWX/DSWX complement: KSWXs/DSWXs are not required in a single shelf configuration (that is, when expansion or extension is not required). For redundancy, duplicate all KSWX/DSWX boards (requires redundant KSW/DSW2). In mixed configurations (KSWXs and DSWXs), KSWXs can be redundant to DSWXs and vice-versa. KSWXs/DSWXs are used in three modes: KSWX/DSWXE (Expansion) are required to interconnect the KSWs/DSW2s for sites with multiple KSWs/DSW2s. KSWX/DSWXR (Remote) are required in shelves with KSWs/DSW2s to drive the TDM highway in shelves that do not have KSWs/DSW2s. KSWX/DSWXL (Local) are used in shelves that have KSWs/DSW2s to drive the clock bus in that shelf and in shelves that do not have KSWs/DSW2s to drive both the local TDM highway and the clock bus in that shelf.
Five of the redundant KSWX/DSWX slots are also CLKX slots. The maximum number of KSWX/DSWX slots per shelf is 18, nine per KSW/DSW2. KSWXs and DSWXs may both be used. However, KSWXs and DSWXs should always be used with like pairs, i.e. DSWXs with DSWXs and KSWXs with KSWXs (see next point for an additional restriction). Operation in enhanced capacity mode requires the use of all DSWXs (and DSW2s). NOTE Variable length fibre optic cables may be used when only DSWX pairs are used at a transcoder site. This is because the DSWX has an elastic buffer that compensates for the variable signal delay. The advantage of variable length cables is in the cost savings of shorter cables between some of the RXU/RXU3 shelves.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-29
Version 1 Rev 3
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Where:
is:
the number of KSWX/DSWX required. the number of KSWX/DSWXE. the number of KSWX/DSWXR. the number of KSWX/DSWXL. the number of non-redundant KSW/DSWXs. the number of extension/expansion shelves.
8-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Kiloport Switch Extender (KSWX) and Double Kiloport Switch Extender (DSWX)
Version 1 Rev 3
Extension shelves
Table 8-2
Extension shelves 0 1 2 3 4 2 6 10 14 18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-31
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the GCLK complement: One GCLK is required at each RXCDR. A second GCLK is optionally requested for redundancy. Both GCLKs must reside in the same shelf of the RXCDR.
8-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the CLKX complement: One CLKX is required in the first RXU shelf, which contains the GCLK, when expansion beyond the shelf occurs. Each CLKX can supply the GCLK signals to six shelves. There are three CLKX slots for each GCLK, allowing each GCLK to support up to 18 shelves (LAN extension only allows fourteen shelves in a single network element). The maximum number of CLKX slots per shelf is six. NOTE The CLKX uses six of the redundant KSWX slots. With a CLKX, a KSWX/DSWXL is required to distribute the clocks in the master and each of the expansion/extension cages. For redundancy, duplicate each CLKX (requires a redundant GCLK).
Where:
NCLKX ROUND UP E RF
is:
the number of CLKX required. rounding up to the next integer. the number of shelves. Redundancy factor (1 if redundancy required (recommended). 0 for no redundancy).
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-33
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the LANX complement: One LANX is supplied in each shelf. For full redundancy add one LANX for each shelf. The LANX can support a maximum network size of 14 shelves.
Where:
NLANX NRXU RF
is:
the number of LANX required. the number of RXU shelves. Redundancy factor (1 if redundancy required (recommended). 0 for no redundancy).
RXU 14
8-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the PIX complement: The maximum number of PIX board slots per shelf is two. The maximum number of PIX board slots per site is eight.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-35
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the line interface complement: To match a balanced 120 ohm (E1 2.048 Mbit/s) or balanced 110 ohm (T1 1.544 Mbit/s) 3 V (peak pulse) line use a BIB. To match a single ended 75 ohm 2.37 V (peak pulse) line use a T43 Board (T43). Each BIB/T43 can interface six E1/T1 links to specific slots on one shelf. All E1/T1 links must be terminated, including the links which are fully contained in the cabinet, for example, between RXU and BSU or links used for T1 to E1 conversion. Up to four BIBs or T43s per shelf can be mounted on a BSSC2 cabinet. A maximum of 24 E1/T1 links can be connected to a RXU shelf. A BSSC2 cabinet with two RXU shelves can interface 48 E1/T1 links. A maximum of 38 E1/T1 links can be connected to a RXU3 shelf. A BSSC3 cabinet with two RXU3 shelves can interface 76 E1/T1 links. NOTE NOTE When fully equipping two RXU3 shelves with 38 E1s each, there will be four unused E1/T1 links on two of the BIB/T43s. GDP2s must be used to fully utilize two E1s per slot.
8-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the PSM complement: Two DPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC/RXCDR. Two IPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC2/RXCDR (-48/-60 V dc). Two EPSMs are required for each shelf in the BSSC2/RXCDR (+27 V dc). For redundancy, add one DPSM, IPSM or EPSM for each shelf.
Where:
RF
is:
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-37
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors should be considered when planning the BBBX complement: One BBBX is required per shelf.
8-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
8-39
Version 1 Rev 3
8-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 9
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-1
Version 1 Rev 3
9-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the principle of the Location Services feature. Explain the different methods of location estimation. Describe the planning steps for a system supporting LCS. Determine the signalling link requirements for a system supporting LCS. Determine the digital card requirement for a system supporting LCS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
Chapter overview
Introduction to LCS provisioning
This chapter provides the planning steps and rules for the BSC when supporting LCS. Only those equipments affected by LCS are covered in this chapter, for those not affected refere to chapter 5. This chapter contains: LCS overview. Capacity calculations. Determining the required BSS signalling link capacities with LCS. Determine the number of RSLs required with LCS. Determine the number of MTLs required with LCS. Determine the number of location service MTLs (LMTLs) required between BSC and SMLC. BSC GPROC functions and types with LCS. Traffic models with LCS. Planning rules for BSC to BTS links (E1/T1). Planning rules for BSC to BTS links (RSL). Planning rules for BSC to MSC links (MTL). Planning rules for BSC to SMLC links (LMTL).
BSC planning.
9-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-5
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS description
LCS description
LCS overview
Location services (LCS) provides a set of capabilities that determine location estimates of mobile stations and makes that information available to location applications. Applications requesting location estimates from LCS can be located in the MS, the network, or external to the PLMN. LCS is not classified as a supplementary service and can be subscribed to without subscribing to a basic telecommunication service. LCS is applicable to any target MS, whether or not the MS supports LCS, but with restrictions on choice of positioning method or notification of a location request to the MS user when LCS or individual positioning methods respectively are not supported by the MS. LCS utilizes one or more positioning mechanisms in order to determine the location of a mobile station. Positioning a MS involves two main steps: Signal measurements Location estimate computation based on the measured signals. Location service requests can be divided into three categories: Mobile originating location request (MO-LR) Any location request from a client MS to the LCS server made over the GSM air interface. While an MO-LR could be used to request the location of another MS, its primary purpose is to obtain an estimate of the client MSs own location, either for the client MS itself or for another LCS client designated by the MS. Mobile terminating location request (MT-LR) Any location request from a LCS client where the client is treated as being external to the PLMN to which the location request is made. Network induced location request (NI-LR) Any location request for a target MS from a client that can be considered to lie inside any of the PLMN entities currently serving the target MS. In this case, the LCS client is also within the LCS server. Examples of a NI-LR include a location request needed for supplementary services, for emergency call origination and by O&M in a visited PLMN.
9-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
LCS description
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-7
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS description
Assisted global positioning system (A-GPS) positioning mechanism The basic idea of A-GPS is to establish a GPS reference network (or a wide area differential GPS network) whose receivers have clear views of the sky and can operate continuously. This reference network is also connected with the GSM network. At the request of a MS-based or network-based application, the assistance data from the reference network is transmitted to the MS to increase performance of the GPS sensor. For classification, when the position is calculated at the network, it is called a mobile assisted solution. When the position is calculated at the handset, it is called a mobile based solution. If implemented properly, the A-GPS method should be able to: 1. 2. 3. Reduce the sensor start up time. Increase the sensor sensitivity. Consume less handset power than conventional GPS does. Additional assisted data, such as differential GPS corrections, approximate handset location or cell base station location and others, can be transmitted to improve the location accuracy and decrease acquisition time.
9-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
LCS description
Version 1 Rev 3
System architecture
Figure 9-1 shows the LCS architecture. Figure 9-1 Generic LCS logical architecture
LMU Type A
Um
CBC
SMLC
Lp
SMLC
Lb Ls
HLR
Lh
MS
Abis
BSC
MSC/VLR
Lg
Gateway MLC
Lc
Le
Abis
Lg
LMU Type A
gsmSCF
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-9
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS description
BSS The BSS is involved in the handling of various positioning procedures. The BSS needs to be modified to support: New LCS messages on the A-interface or Lb interface. New LCS messages on the Abis interface and Um interface. LCS client The LCS client is outside the scope of this standard. GMLC The gateway mobile location centre (GMLC) contains functionality required to support LCS. In one PLMN there may be more than one GMLC. The GMLC is the first node an external LCS client accesses in a GSM PLMN (that is, the Le reference point is supported by the GMLC). The GMLC may request routeing information from the HLR via the Lh interface. After performing registration authorization, it sends positioning requests to and receives final location estimates from the VMSC through the Lg interface.
9-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
LCS description
Version 1 Rev 3
SMLC The serving mobile location centre (SMLC) contains functionality required to support LCS. In one PLMN there may be more than one SMLC. The SMLC manages the overall co-ordination and scheduling of resources required to perform positioning of a mobile. It also calculates the final location estimate and accuracy. Two types of SMLC are possible: NSS based SMLC - supports the Ls interface, see Figure 9-1. BSS based SMLC - supports the Lb interface see Figure 9-2. An NSS based SMLC supports positioning of a target MS via signalling on the Ls interface to the visited MSC. A BSS-based SMLC supports positioning via signalling on the Lb interface to the BSC serving the target MS. Both types of SMLC may support the Lp interface to enable access to information and resources owned by another SMLC. The SMLC controls a number of LMUs for the purpose of obtaining radio interface measurements to locate or help locate MS subscribers in the area that it serves. The SMLC is administered with the capabilities and types of measurement produced by each of its LMUs. Signalling between a NSS-based SMLC and LMU is transferred via the MSC serving the LMU using the Ls interface and either the Um interface for a Type A LMU or the Abis interface for a Type B LMU. Signalling between a BSS based SMLC and LMU is transferred via the BSC that serves or controls the LMU using the Lb interface and either the Um interface for a Type A LMU or the Abis interface for a Type B LMU. For LCS, when a cell broadcast centre (CBC) is associated with a BSC, the SMLC may interface to a CBC in order to broadcast assistance data using existing cell broadcast capabilities. The SMLC behaves as a user, cell broadcast entity, to the CBC. MS The MS may be involved in the various positioning procedures. LMU A LMU makes radio measurements to support one or more positioning methods. These measurements fall into one of two categories: Location measurements specific to one MS used to compute the location of this MS. Assistance measurements specific to all MSs in a certain geographic area. All location and assistance measurements obtained by an LMU are supplied to a particular SMLC associated with the LMU. Instructions concerning the timing, the nature and any periodicity of these measurements are either provided by the SMLC or are pre-administered in the LMU. Two types of LMU are defined: Type A LMU: accessed over the normal GSM air interface. Type B LMU: accessed over the Abis interface. MSC The MSC contains functionality responsible for MS subscription authorization and managing call-related and non call-related positioning requests of GSM LCS. The MSC is accessible to the GMLC through the Lg interface and the SMLC via the Ls interface.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-11
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS description
HLR The HLR contains LCS subscription data and routing information. The HLR is accessible from the GMLC through the Lh interface. For roaming MSs, the HLR may be in a different PLMN that the current SMLC. The system architecture is differentiated by which network entity the SMLC is connected to. When SMLC is connected to a MSC, the system architecture is referred as an NSS-based LCS architecture; otherwise, a BSS based LCS architecture when SMLC is connected to a BSC. NSS-based LCS architecture In this architecture (see Figure 9-2), the SMLC is connected to a MSC instead of a BSC. The MSC acts as relay point for LCS signalling between the SMLC and BSC.
9-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
LCS description
Version 1 Rev 3
Figure 9-2
NSS-based architecture
HLR
Lh
LMU
BTS
BSC
MSC
Lg
Gateway MLC
Le
Le
Gateway MLC Other PLMN LMU: Location measurement unit MLC: Mobile location centre
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-13
Version 1 Rev 3
LCS description
9-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
LCS description
Version 1 Rev 3
BSS-based LCS architecture In this architecture (see Figure 9-3), the SMLC is connected to a BSC instead of a MSC. The LCS signalling between the SMLC and BSC goes directly between these two entities. Figure 9-3 BSS-based architecture
HLR
Lh
LMU
BTS
BSC
MSC
Lg
Gateway MLC
Le
Le
Gateway MLC Other PLMN LMU: Location measurement unit MLC: Mobile location centre
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-15
Version 1 Rev 3
6. 7.
9-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Capacity calculations
Capacity calculations
Introduction
In addition to the capacity calculations in Chapter 6, the additional traffic load resulting from LCS needs to be taken into consideration in the capacity calculations. This section provides information on how to calculate processor requirements, signalling link capacities and BSC processing capacities for LCS. When equipping the BSS, equipage results in this chapter need to be combined with the results given in Chapter 6. This section describes: The required BSS signalling link capacities. Traffic models for LCS. BSC GPROC functions and types. The number of GPROCs required.
9-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Capacity calculations
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-19
Version 1 Rev 3
9-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
= 0.20 = 0.25
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-21
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 9-2
Other parameters used in determining GPROC and link requirements Parameter reference N B C PPC = P * (T/N)
Busy hour peak signalling traffic model Number of MSC - BSC trunks Number of BTSs per BSS Number of cells per BSS Pages per call
An additional assumption, which is made in determining the values listed above in Table 9-3, is that the procedures not included in the traffic model are considered to have negligible effect. Paging assumptions Refer to Chapter 6, Paging assumptions.
Link capacities
Refer to Chapter 6, Link capacities. Take care that LCS signalling between MSC and BSC, and BSC and SMLC are all provided for by C7 links. The total number of MTLs, and/or LMTLs should not exceed 16.
9-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
Refers to Chapter 7, RSL planning considerations.
n = number of TCHs at the BTS n <= 30 31 < n <= 60 61 < n <= 90 91 < n <= 120 121 < n <= 150 151 < n <= 180
NOTE
A BTS shall support either 64 Kbit/s RSLs or 16 Kbit/s RSLs, but not both.
9-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
If the call parameters differ significantly from those given in Table 9-1, use the following formula to determine the required number of 16 kbit/s RSLs for CS signalling with LCS supported, (Rounded up to the next integer).
16 kbit/s RSLs for GPRS signalling refers to Chapter 5, Determining the RSL number required. Where: RSLGSM N Lcs S H L U T PGSM NOTE is: the number of BSC to BTS signalling links for GSM. the number of TCHs at the BTS site. the ratio of LCSs to calls the ratio of SMSs to calls. the number of handovers per call. the location update factor. the percent link utilization (for example 0.20). the average call duration. the GSM paging rate in pages per second. A BTS can support either 64 kbit/s RSLs or 16 kbit/s RSLs, but not both.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Where:
GL3 n B Lcs C
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required to support the layer 3 call processing. the number of TCHs at the BSC. the number of BTS sites. the ratio of LCSs to calls (0.2). the number of cells.
NOTE
As an approximation, the LCS procedure will not exceed 45% of processor resources compared with CS calls and may be updated by statistics results from performance simulations.
Non-standard traffic model If the call parameters differ significantly from those given in Table 9-1, the alternative formula given below should be used to determine the recommended number of LCFs.
Where:
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required for layer 3 call processing. the number of TCHs under the BSC. the ratio of LCSs to calls (0.2). the ratio of SMSs to calls. the number of handovers per call. the ratio of intra-BSC handovers to all handovers. the location update factor. the average call duration. the paging rate in pages per second. the number of BTS sites. the number of cells.
NOTE
The above formula has been calculated using 70% mean utilization of GPROC2.
9-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
In addition to those considerations described in Determining the number of MTLs required in Chapter 7, the following factors should be considered when planning the LCS signalling links from the BSC to MSC: Determine the LCS architecture supported by the BSC. The BSC may support either NSS-based LCS architecture or BSS-based LCS architecture, but not both. Determine the LCS traffic requirements for the BSC. The traffic may be determined using the following method: Multiply the number of subscribers expected to use the BSC by the average LCS traffic per subscriber.
Total number of MTLs and/or LMTL (if BSS-based LCS architecture is supported). This should not exceed 16, which is the total number of C7 links. NOTE These calculations are for the MTLs required from the BSS perspective, using the BSS planning rules. If the MSC vendor supplies their own planning rules for a given configuration, the more conservative MTL provisioning figures should be used. If the MSC vendor does not provide the planning rules for the MTLs required in a downlink direction, then use a load share granularity of 0 to be conservative in MTL provisioning. Load sharing of MTLs in the downlink direction depends on the mechanism used by the MSC to load share the signalling links from the MSC to BSC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-27
Version 1 Rev 3
9-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 9-5 to Table 9-8 show how to estimate the number of MTLs to be used for the BSC, with 20% and 40% link utilization, respectively. Table 9-5 Number of MSC and BSC signalling links(NSS-based LCS at 20% utilization) No. of MTLs with 16 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 Recommended 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 9 9 9 16 16 16 16 No. of MTLs with 64 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10 11 13 16 Recommended 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11 12 14 16
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC trunks or the offered load from the BTSs N <= 160 160 < N <= 360 360 < N <= 480 480 < N <= 560 560 < N <= 760 760 < N <= 920 920 < N <= 1000 1000 < N <= 1080 1080 < N <= 1200 1200 < N <= 1520 1520 < N <= 1720 1720 < N <= 2000 2000 < N <= 2400 2400 <N <= 3000
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-29
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 9-6
Number of MSC and BSC signalling links(BSS-based LCS at 20% utilization) No. of MTLs with 16 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 Recommended 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 9 9 9 16 16 16 16 No. of MTLs with 64 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10 11 13 16 Recommended 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11 12 14 16
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC trunks or the offered load from the BTSs N <= 160 160 < N <= 360 360 < N <= 480 480 < N <= 520 520 < N <= 760 760 < N <= 920 920 < N <= 1000 1000 < N <= 1080 1080 < N <= 1200 1200 < N <= 1520 1520 < N <= 1720 1720 < N <= 2000 2000 < N <= 2400 2400 <N <= 3000
Table 9-7
Number of MSC and BSC signalling links(NSS-based LCS at 40% utilization) No. of MTLs with 16 logical links No. of MTLs with 64 logical links
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC trunks or the offered load from the BTSs
Minimum required N <= 360 360 <N <= 760 760 < N <= 1000 1000 < N <= 1080 1080 < N <= 1520 1520 < N <= 1840 1840 < N <= 2000 2000 < N <= 2200 2200 < N <= 2400 2400 < N <= 3040 3040 < N <= 3200 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 16
Recommended 2 3 4 5 5 7 7 9 9 9 16
Minimum required 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10
Recommended 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11
9-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 9-8
Number of MSC and BSC signalling links(BSS-based LCS at 40% utilization) No. of MTLs with 16 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 16 Recommended 2 3 4 5 5 7 7 9 9 9 16 No. of MTLs with 64 logical links Minimum required 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10 Recommended 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11
N = the greater of number of MSC-BSC trunks or the offered load from the BTSs N <= 360 360 <N <= 760 760 < N <= 1000 1000 < N <= 1080 1080 < N <= 1480 1480 < N <= 1840 1840 < N <= 2000 2000 < N <= 2200 2200 < N <= 2400 2400 < N <= 3000 3000 < N <= 3200
NOTE
The capacities shown in Table 9-5 to Table 9-8 are based on the standard traffic model shown in Table 9-1. It is recommended that the C7 links be designed to operate at no more than 20% link utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC, and no more than 40% utilization when the MTL is running on a GPROC2. However, before use of the 40% utilization of GPROC2, it is imperative that the operator verifies that the MSC vendor can also support 40% utilization at the MSC end, if not, then only 20% link utilization should be used for GPROC2.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-31
Version 1 Rev 3
2. Use the formula detailed below to determine the maximum number of Erlangs supported by a GPROC2 (LCF-MTL) supporting a C7 signalling link (nlLCF-MTL).
3. The maximum amount of traffic a MTL (a physical link) can handle (nlmin) is the smaller of the two numbers from Steps 1 and 2. 4. Signalling over the A-interface is uniformly distributed over a number of logical links. The number of logical links is defined on the BSC by database parameter mtl_loadshare_granularity = 0 or 1, which corresponds to 16 or 64 logical links, respectively, over which the MTL signalling is load shared. Hence, the total amount of traffic that a logical link would hold, is calculated as:
5. (nlog-per-mtl):
Where Ng= 16 or 64. Next we need to determine the number of logical links each MTL (physical link) can handle
6.
NOTE
mtls should not exceed 16 per BSC. The formula in step Step 2 has been calculated using 70% mean utilization of GPROC2. Field experience suggests it is good practice to maintain the mean utilization of GPROCs at or below 70%. All GPROCs should function normally up to 100% utilization. Beyond this, inter-process communication will start to slow down due to queueing of internal BSS messages, thus impacting on system performance.
9-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
LCFs for MSC to BSC links Since one LCF GPROC2 can support two MTLs, the number of required LCF is:
However, if the traffic model does not conform to the standard model, below formula will be used:
otherwise:
Where:
is:
the number of LCF GPROC2s required. rounding up to the next integer. calculated in the previous section. calculated in the previous section. calculated in the previous section.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-33
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
The following factors need to be considered when planning the number of LMTL links from the BSC to the SMLC: Determine the LCS traffic requirements of the BSC. A BSC can only connect to one SMLC.
Where:
is:
the number of BSC to SMLC signalling links. requests number per BSC per second. the percentage of the link utilization. rounding up to the next integer.
9-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Planning considerations
Besides those factors considered and specified in Chapter 6, when planning the GPROC2 complement each BSC also requires: The number of LCFs to support LMTLs for BSS-based LCS architecture. Link control function Combined with what specified in Chapter 6, the following factors should be considered when planning the number of LCFs: LMTLs are handled by dedicated LCFs for BSS-based LCS architecture. One dedicated LCS LCF GPROC2 is needed to support the SMLC link protocol for LCS. The planning rules for LCFs exclusively using GPROC2 are: A single GPROC2 will support up to 31 BTS sites and 31 RSLs, limited to the following calculation:
Where carriers = the total number of radios for the BTS site(s).
Where nLCF = the number of TCHs on the sites under a LCF and n = the total number of sites on the LCF. If any LCF does not satisfy the above criteria, either rebalancing of sites on the available LCF-GPROC2s at the BSC is required or additional LCF-GPROC2s may need to be equipped at the BSC to handle the traffic load. NOTE It is not recommended that an LCF supports both an LMTL and BSC to BTS signalling links.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
9-35
Version 1 Rev 3
9-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Exercises
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 10
Exercises
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-1
Version 1 Rev 3
Exercises
10-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Chapter objectives
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter objectives
On completion of this chapter the student will have: Completed BTS and BSC planning exercises
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-3
Version 1 Rev 3
10-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-5
Version 1 Rev 3
10-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Determine a suitable hardware configuration utilizing the Horizonmacro GSM900 equipment range.
10-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
LAC2
Key:
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-9
Version 1 Rev 3
Determine the planning requirements, to include: Number of timeslots and hence the number of 2 Mbit/s links required between: BSC -BTS 1 BTS1-BTS 2 BTS1-BTS 3 BTS1-BTS 4 BTS3-BTS 4
Number of trunks between BSC-RXCDR. Number of MTLs between BSC-MSC. Number of 2 Mbit/s links between BSC-RXCDR. Total number of MSI cards required at the BSC. Number of links between RXCDR-MSC.
10-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Exercise 1
MSC
RXCDR
OMC-R
BSC
BTS 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-11
Version 1 Rev 3
You are to determine the number of GPROC2s (BSP, LCF) required at the BSC Ensure the LCF loading has not been exceeded.
10-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-13
Version 1 Rev 3
10-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 1
Table 1
Site # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Totals Surveyed Erlangs 26.532 25.212 23.364 17.127 17.358 22.803 22.143 15.015 18.744 26.367 6.963 4.917 4.092 6.171 3.102 6.204 3.069 1.947 3.432 5.346 5.082 7.326 6.963 6.171 285.45 RTFs 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 88 TCHs 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 616 Subs @ 0.033Erl 804 764 708 519 526 691 671 455 568 799 211 149 124 187 94 188 93 59 104 162 154 222 211 187 8650
10-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Table 1
Version 1 Rev 3
Stage 1
Determine traffic requirements for the BSC including the growth factor. Answer
Stage 2
Calculate number of C7 signalling links required (Each link being 20% utilised). Given: Call duration = 120 sec Ratio of SMS per call = 0.1 Ratio of handovers = 2.5 Ratio of total pages sent = 3 Ratio of Intra-BSC handovers = 0.6 Ratio of Location Updates = 2 Answer
Stage 3
Determine the 2.048 Mbit/s requirements, (transcoding is being carried out at the MSC). Answer
Stage 4
Calculate the number of LCFs required for RSL support. Answer
Stage 5
Determine number of GPROCs required. Answer
Stage 6
Determine the number of MSI boards required. Answer
Stage 7
List the hardware requirements for the BSSC. Answer
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
10-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Table 1
10-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 11
Erlang Tables
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-1
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Grade of Service 0.01% 0.0001 0.0142 0.0868 0.2347 0.4520 0.7282 1.0541 1.4219 1.8256 2.2601 2.7216 3.2069 3.7133 4.2387 4.7811 5.3389 5.9109 6.4958 7.0927 7.7005 8.3186 8.9462 9.5826 10.2274 10.8800 11.5400 12.2069 12.8803 13.5600 14.2456 14.9367 0.1% 0.0010 0.0458 0.1938 0.4393 0.7621 1.1459 1.5786 2.0513 2.5575 3.0920 3.8511 4.2314 4.8305 5.4464 6.0772 6.7215 7.3781 8.0459 8.7239 9.4115 10.1077 10.8121 11.5241 12.2432 12.9689 13.7008 14.4385 15.1818 15.9304 16.6839 17.4420 0.5% 0.0050 0.1054 0.3490 0.7012 1.1320 1.6218 2.1575 2.7299 3.3326 3.9607 4.6104 5.2789 5.9638 6.6632 7.3755 8.0995 8.8340 9.5780 10.3308 11.0916 11.8598 12.6349 13.4164 14.2038 14.9968 15.7949 16.5980 17.4057 18.2177 19.0339 19.8540 1.0% 0.0101 0.1526 0.4555 0.8694 1.3608 1.9090 2.5009 3.1276 3.7825 4.4612 5.1599 5.8760 6.6072 7.3517 8.1080 8.8750 9.6516 10.4369 11.2301 12.0306 12.8378 13.6513 14.4705 15.2950 16.1246 16.9588 17.7974 18.6402 19.4869 20.3373 21.1912 2.0% 0.0204 0.2235 0.6022 1.0923 1.6571 2.2759 2.9354 3.6271 4.3447 5.0840 5.8415 6.6147 7.4015 8.2003 9.0096 9.8284 10.6558 11.4909 12.3330 13.1815 14.0360 14.8959 15.7609 16.6306 17.5046 18.3828 19.2648 20.1504 21.0394 21.9316 22.8268 4.0% 0.0417 0.3333 0.8120 1.3994 2.0573 2.7649 3.5095 4.2830 5.0796 5.8954 6.7272 7.5727 8.4300 9.2977 10.1745 11.0594 11.9516 12.8504 13.7552 14.6654 15.5807 16.5005 17.4245 18.3526 19.2842 20.2193 21.1576 22.0988 23.0429 23.9896 24.9388 5.0% 0.0526 0.3813 0.8994 1.5246 2.2185 2.9603 3.7378 4.5430 5.3702 6.2157 7.0764 7.9501 8.8349 9.7295 10.6327 11.5436 12.4613 13.3852 14.3147 15.2493 16.1885 17.1320 18.0795 19.0307 19.9853 20.9430 21.9037 22.8672 23.8333 24.8018 25.7726
11-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
Grade of Service 0.01% 15.6332 16.3348 17.0412 17.7523 18.4678 19.1876 19.9115 20.6392 21.3708 22.1059 22.8446 23.5867 24.3319 25.0804 25.8318 26.5862 27.3435 28.1035 28.8661 29.6313 30.3991 31.1693 31.9418 32.7166 33.4937 34.2730 35.0543 35.8377 36.6232 37.4105 38.1998 38.9910 39.7839 40.5787 41.3751 0.1% 18.2047 18.9716 19.7426 20.5174 21.2960 22.0781 22.8636 23.6523 24.4442 25.2391 26.0369 26.8374 27.6407 28.4466 29.2549 30.0657 30.8789 31.6943 32.5119 33.3316 34.1533 34.9771 35.8028 36.6305 37.4599 38.2911 39.1241 39.9587 40.7950 41.6328 42.4723 43.3132 44.1557 44.9995 45.8448 0.5% 20.6777 21.5050 22.3356 23.1694 24.0063 24.8461 25.6887 26.5340 27.3818 28.2321 29.0848 29.9397 30.7969 31.6562 32.5175 33.3807 34.2459 35.1129 35.9818 36.8523 37.7245 38.5983 39.4737 40.3506 41.2290 42.1089 42.9901 43.8727 44.7566 45.6418 46.5283 47.4160 48.3049 49.1949 50.0861 1.0% 22.0483 22.9087 23.7720 24.6381 25.5070 26.3785 27.2525 28.1288 29.0074 29.8882 30.7712 31.6561 32.5430 33.4317 34.3223 35.2146 36.1086 37.0042 37.9014 38.8001 39.7003 40.6019 41.5049 42.4092 43.3149 44.2218 45.1299 46.0392 46.9497 47.8613 48.7740 49.6878 50.6026 51.5185 52.4353 2.0% 23.7249 24.6257 25.5291 26.4349 27.3431 28.2536 29.1661 30.0808 30.9973 31.9158 32.8360 33.7580 34.6817 35.6069 36.5337 37.4619 38.3916 39.3227 40.2551 41.1889 42.1238 43.0600 43.9973 44.9358 45.8754 46.8160 47.7577 48.7004 49.6441 50.5887 51.5342 52.4807 53.4280 54.3762 55.3252 4.0% 25.8904 26.8442 27.8002 28.7581 29.7180 30.6796 31.6431 32.6081 33.5748 34.5430 35.5126 36.4837 37.4560 38.4297 39.4046 40.3807 41.3580 42.3363 43.3157 44.2962 45.2776 46.2600 47.2434 48.2278 49.2127 50.1987 51.1854 52.1730 53.1613 54.1504 55.1403 56.1308 57.1220 58.1139 59.1064 5.0% 26.7457 27.7207 28.6978 29.6767 30.6573 31.6397 32.6236 33.6090 34.5960 35.5843 36.5739 37.5648 38.5570 39.5503 40.5447 41.5403 42.5369 43.5345 44.5331 45.5326 46.5330 47.5343 48.5364 49.5394 50.5431 51.5477 52.5529 53.5589 54.5656 55.5730 56.5810 57.5897 58.5989 59.6088 60.6193
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
Grade of Service 0.01% 42.1733 42.9631 43.7745 44.5775 45.3820 46.1881 46.9956 47.8046 48.6150 49.4268 50.2399 51.0544 51.8701 52.6872 53.5055 54.3251 55.1458 55.9678 56.7909 57.6152 58.4406 59.2671 60.0946 60.9233 61.7530 62.5837 63.4155 64.2482 65.0819 65.9166 66.7522 67.5888 68.4263 69.2647 70.1040 0.1% 46.6915 47.5395 48.3888 49.2394 50.0913 50.9444 51.7987 52.6542 53.5108 54.3685 55.2274 56.0873 56.9483 57.8104 58.6734 59.5375 60.4025 61.2685 62.1354 63.0033 63.8721 64.7417 65.6123 66.4837 67.3559 68.2290 69.1029 69.9776 70.8531 71.7294 72.6064 73.4842 74.3627 75.2420 76.1220 0.5% 50.9783 51.8717 52.7661 53.6615 54.5579 55.4554 56.3537 57.2530 58.1533 59.0544 59.9564 60.8593 61.7630 62.6676 63.5729 64.4791 65.3860 66.2937 67.2021 68.1113 69.0212 69.9318 70.8431 71.7551 72.6677 73.5811 74.4950 75.4096 76.3248 77.2407 78.1571 79.0741 79.9917 80.9099 81.8287 1.0% 53.3531 54.2718 55.1915 56.1120 57.0335 57.9558 58.8789 59.8028 60.7276 61.6531 62.5794 63.5065 64.4343 65.3628 66.2920 67.2219 68.1524 69.0837 70.0156 70.9481 71.8812 72.8150 73.7494 74.6843 75.6198 76.5560 77.4926 78.4298 79.3676 80.3059 81.2447 82.1840 83.1238 84.0642 85.0050 2.0% 56.2750 57.2256 58.1770 59.1291 60.0820 61.0355 61.9898 62.9448 63.9004 64.8567 65.8136 66.7712 67.7293 68.6881 69.6474 70.6073 71.5678 72.5288 73.4904 74.4525 75.4151 76.3782 77.3418 78.3059 79.2705 80.2356 81.2011 82.1671 83.1335 84.1003 85.0676 86.0353 87.0035 87.9720 88.9409 4.0% 60.0996 61.0934 62.0878 63.0827 64.0783 65.0744 66.0710 67.0682 68.0659 69.0641 70.0628 71.0619 72.0616 73.0617 74.0622 75.0632 76.0647 77.0665 78.0688 79.0715 80.0745 81.0780 82.0818 83.0861 84.0906 85.0956 86.1009 87.1065 88.1125 89.1188 90.1254 91.1324 92.1396 93.1472 94.1551 5.0% 61.6304 62.6420 63.6541 64.6668 65.6800 66.6937 67.7079 68.7225 69.7377 70.7532 71.7693 72.7857 73.8026 74.8199 75.8376 76.8557 77.8742 78.8930 79.9123 80.9319 81.9518 82.9721 83.9927 85.0137 86.0350 87.0566 88.0786 89.1008 90.1233 91.1462 92.1693 93.1927 94.2164 95.2404 96.2646
11-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136
Grade of Service 0.01% 70.9441 71.7852 72.6270 73.4698 74.3133 75.1577 76.0028 76.8488 77.6955 78.5430 79.3913 80.2403 81.0901 81.9405 82.7917 83.6437 84.4963 85.3496 86.2036 87.0582 87.9135 88.7695 89.6261 90.4834 91.3413 92.1998 93.0589 93.9187 94.7790 95.6400 96.5015 97.3636 98.2263 99.0896 99.9534 0.1% 77.0026 77.8840 78.7661 79.6488 80.5322 81.4163 82.3010 83.1863 84.0723 84.9588 85.8460 86.7338 87.6222 88.5112 89.4007 90.2908 91.1815 92.0727 92.9645 93.8568 94.7496 95.6430 96.5369 97.4312 98.3261 99.2215 100.1174 101.0138 101.9106 102.8080 103.7058 104.6040 105.5028 106.4019 107.3015 0.5% 82.7480 83.6678 84.5882 85.5092 86.4306 87.3526 88.2750 89.1980 90.1215 91.0454 91.9698 92.8947 93.8201 94.7459 95.6722 96.5989 97.5260 98.4536 99.3816 100.3100 101.2389 102.1681 103.0978 104.0279 104.9583 105.8892 106.8204 107.7520 108.6840 109.6163 110.5490 111.4821 112.4155 113.3493 114.2834 1.0% 85.9463 86.8880 87.8303 88.7729 89.7161 90.6597 91.6037 92.5481 93.4930 94.4383 95.3840 96.3301 97.2766 98.2235 99.1707 100.1184 101.0664 102.0148 102.9638 103.9128 104.8622 105.8121 106.7623 107.7128 108.6637 109.6149 110.5664 111.5183 112.4705 113.4230 114.3758 115.3289 116.2823 117.2360 118.1900 2.0% 89.9102 90.8800 91.8500 92.8205 93.7914 94.7626 95.7341 96.7060 97.6783 98.6509 99.6238 100.5971 101.5707 102.5446 103.5188 104.4934 105.4682 105.4434 107.4188 108.3945 109.3706 110.3469 111.3235 112.3004 113.2775 114.2549 115.2326 116.2106 117.1888 118.1673 119.1460 120.1250 121.1042 122.0836 123.0633 4.0% 95.1633 96.1717 97.1805 98.1895 99.1988 100.2084 101.2183 102.2284 103.2388 104.2494 105.2603 106.2715 107.2829 108.2945 109.3063 110.3184 111.3308 112.3433 113.3561 114.3691 115.3823 116.3957 117.4093 118.4231 119.4372 120.4514 121.4658 122.4805 123.4953 124.5103 125.5255 126.5409 127.5564 128.5722 129.5881 5.0% 97.2891 98.3139 99.3389 100.3642 101.3897 102.4154 103.4414 104.4677 105.4941 106.5208 107.5477 108.5748 109.6022 110.6297 111.6575 112.6855 113.7136 114.7420 115.7706 116.7993 117.8283 118.8574 119.8868 120.9163 121.9459 122.9758 124.0058 125.0360 126.0664 127.0970 128.1277 129.1585 130.1896 131.2207 132.2521
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-5
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171
Grade of Service 0.01% 100.8178 101.6827 102.5481 103.4141 104.2807 105.1477 106.0153 106.8834 107.7520 108.6211 109.4906 110.3607 111.2313 112.1024 112.9739 113.8459 114.7184 115.5913 116.4647 117.3385 118.2128 119.0875 119.9627 120.8383 121.7144 122.5908 123.4877 124.3450 125.2228 126.1009 126.9795 127.8584 128.7378 129.6175 130.4976 0.1% 108.2016 109.1021 110.0030 110.9044 111.8062 112.7084 113.6110 114.5140 115.4174 116.3212 117.2255 118.1301 119.0351 119.9404 120.8482 121.7523 122.6588 123.5657 124.4729 125.3805 126.2885 127.1968 128.1054 129.0144 129.9238 130.8335 131.7435 132.6538 133.5645 134.4755 135.3868 136.2985 137.2104 138.1227 139.0353 0.5% 115.2179 116.1527 117.0879 118.0234 118.9592 119.8953 120.8318 121.7685 122.7056 123.6430 124.5807 125.5187 126.4570 127.3956 128.3345 129.2737 130.2131 131.1529 132.0929 133.0332 133.9738 134.9147 135.8558 136.7972 137.7389 138.6808 139.6230 140.5654 141.5081 142.4510 143.3942 144.3377 145.2814 146.2253 147.1694 1.0% 119.1443 120.0989 121.0538 122.0090 122.9645 123.9202 124.8762 125.8325 126.7890 127.7458 128.7029 129.6602 130.6178 131.5756 132.5337 133.4920 134.4506 135.4094 136.3684 137.3277 138.2872 139.2470 140.2070 141.1672 142.1276 143.0883 144.0491 145.0102 145.9715 146.9330 147.8948 148.8567 149.8189 150.7812 151.7438 2.0% 124.0433 125.0234 126.0038 126.9845 127.9653 128.9464 129.9277 130.9092 131.8910 132.8729 133.8551 134.8375 135.8200 136.8028 137.7858 138.7690 139.7523 140.7359 141.7196 142.7036 143.6877 144.6720 145.6565 146.6412 147.6261 148.6111 149.5963 150.5817 151.5673 152.5530 153.5389 154.5250 155.5112 156.4976 157.4842 4.0% 130.6042 131.6204 132.6369 133.6535 134.6702 135.6872 136.7043 137.7215 138.7389 139.7565 140.7742 141.7921 142.8101 143.8282 144.8466 145.8650 146.8836 147.9024 148.9212 149.9403 150.9594 151.9787 152.9981 154.0177 155.0374 156.0572 157.0771 158.0972 159.1174 160.1377 161.1581 162.1787 163.1993 164.2201 165.2410 5.0% 133.2836 134.3152 135.3470 136.3789 137.4110 138.4432 139.4756 140.5081 141.5408 142.5736 143.6065 144.6395 145.6727 146.7060 147.7394 148.7730 149.8067 150.8405 151.8744 152.9085 153.9426 154.9769 156.0113 157.0459 158.0805 159.1152 160.1501 161.1850 162.2201 163.2553 164.2906 165.3260 166.3615 167.3970 168.4327
11-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206
Grade of Service 0.01% 131.3782 132.2591 133.1404 134.0221 134.9041 135.7865 136.6693 137.5525 138.4360 139.3199 140.2041 141.0887 141.9737 142.8590 143.7446 144.6306 145.5169 146.4035 147.2905 148.1778 149.0655 149.9535 150.8418 151.7304 152.6193 153.5086 154.3981 155.2880 156.1782 157.0686 157.9594 158.8505 159.7419 160.6336 161.5256 0.1% 139.9482 140.8614 141.7749 142.6887 143.6028 144.5172 145.4319 146.3468 147.2621 148.1776 149.0935 150.0096 150.9260 151.8426 152.7595 153.6768 154.5942 155.5120 156.4299 157.3482 158.2667 159.1855 160.1045 161.0238 161.9433 162.8631 163.7831 164.7034 165.6239 166.5447 167.4657 168.3869 169.3084 170.2301 171.1520 0.5% 148.1138 149.0585 150.0033 150.9484 151.8938 152.8393 153.7851 154.7311 155.6773 156.6237 157.5704 158.5172 159.4643 160.4116 161.3591 162.3068 163.2547 164.2028 165.1511 166.0997 167.0484 167.9973 168.9464 169.8957 170.8452 171.7948 172.7447 173.6948 174.6450 175.5954 176.5460 177.4968 178.4478 179.3989 180.3502 1.0% 152.7065 153.6695 154.6326 155.5960 156.5595 157.5232 158.4872 159.4513 160.4156 161.3800 162.3447 163.3095 164.2746 165.2397 166.2051 167.1707 168.1364 169.1023 170.0684 171.0346 172.0010 172.9675 173.9343 174.9012 175.8682 176.8354 177.8028 178.7703 179.7380 180.7059 181.6739 182.6420 183.6103 184.5787 185.5473 2.0% 158.4709 159.4578 160.4448 161.4320 162.4194 163.4069 164.3945 165.3823 166.3702 167.3583 168.3466 169.3350 170.3235 171.3121 172.3009 173.2899 174.2790 175.2682 176.2575 177.2470 178.2366 179.2264 180.2153 181.2063 182.1964 183.1867 184.1771 185.1676 186.1582 187.1490 188.1398 189.1308 190.1219 191.1132 192.1045 4.0% 166.2620 167.2832 168.3044 169.3258 170.3472 171.3688 172.3905 173.4123 174.4342 175.4562 176.4783 177.5005 178.5228 179.5452 180.5678 181.5904 182.6131 183.6359 184.6588 185.6818 186.7049 187.7280 188.7513 189.7747 190.7981 191.8217 192.8453 193.8690 194.8929 195.9168 196.9407 197.9648 198.9890 200.0132 201.0375 5.0% 169.4685 170.5044 171.5404 172.5765 173.6127 174.6490 175.6853 176.7218 177.7583 178.7950 179.8317 180.8686 181.9055 182.9425 183.9795 185.0167 186.0540 187.0913 188.1287 189.1662 190.2038 191.2415 192.2792 193.3170 194.3549 195.3929 196.4310 197.4691 198.5073 199.5456 200.5839 201.6224 202.6609 203.6994 204.7381
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241
Grade of Service 0.01% 162.4178 163.3104 164.2032 165.0964 165.9898 166.8835 167.7774 168.6717 169.5662 170.4610 171.3561 172.2514 173.1470 174.0429 174.9391 175.8354 176.7321 177.6290 178.5262 179.4236 180.3213 181.2192 182.1174 183.0158 183.9145 184.8134 185.7126 186.6120 187.5117 188.4115 189.3116 190.2120 191.1126 192.0134 192.9145 0.1% 172.0741 172.9965 173.9191 174.8420 175.7650 176.6883 177.6118 178.5355 179.4595 180.3836 181.3080 182.2326 183.1573 184.0823 185.0075 185.9329 188.8585 187.7844 188.7104 189.6366 190.5630 191.4896 192.4164 193.3434 194.2706 195.1980 196.1256 197.0533 197.9813 198.9094 199.8377 200.7662 201.6949 202.6238 203.5528 0.5% 181.3017 182.2534 183.2052 184.1572 185.1094 186.0618 187.0143 187.9670 188.9198 189.8728 190.8260 191.7793 192.7328 193.6865 194.6403 195.5942 196.5484 197.5026 198.4571 199.4116 200.3664 201.3212 202.2763 203.2314 204.1868 205.1422 206.0978 207.0536 208.0095 208.9655 209.9217 210.8780 211.8345 212.7911 213.7478 1.0% 186.5161 187.4850 188.4540 189.4232 190.3925 191.3620 192.3316 193.3013 194.2712 195.2412 196.2114 194.1816 198.1521 199.1226 200.0933 201.0641 202.0351 203.0061 203.9774 204.9487 205.9201 206.8917 207.8634 208.8353 209.8072 210.7793 211.7515 212.7238 213.6962 214.6688 215.6415 216.6143 217.5872 218.5602 219.5333 2.0% 193.0960 194.0876 195.0793 196.0711 197.0630 198.0551 199.0472 200.0395 201.0318 202.0243 203.0169 204.0096 205.0023 205.9952 206.9882 207.9813 208.9745 209.9678 210.9612 211.9547 212.9483 213.9421 214.9358 215.9297 216.9237 217.9178 218.9120 219.9063 220.9006 221.8951 222.8897 223.8843 224.8790 225.8739 226.8688 4.0% 202.0619 203.0864 204.1109 205.1356 206.1603 207.1851 208.2100 209.2349 210.2599 211.2850 212.3102 213.3355 214.3608 215.3862 216.4117 217.4372 218.4628 219.4885 220.5143 221.5401 222.5660 223.5919 224.6180 225.6441 226.6702 227.6965 228.7227 229.7491 230.7755 231.8020 232.8286 233.8552 234.8819 235.9086 236.9354 5.0% 205.7768 206.8156 207.8544 208.8933 209.9323 210.9714 212.0105 213.0497 214.0889 215.1283 216.1676 217.2071 218.2466 219.2862 220.3258 221.3655 222.4052 223.4450 224.4849 225.5248 226.5648 227.6049 228.6450 229.6852 230.7254 231.7657 232.8060 233.8464 234.8868 235.9273 236.9679 238.0085 239.0492 240.0899 241.1307
11-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276
Grade of Service 0.01% 193.8157 194.7172 195.6190 196.5209 197.4231 198.3255 199.2281 200.1310 201.0340 201.9373 202.8408 203.7445 204.6484 205.5525 206.4568 207.3614 208.2661 209.1711 210.0763 210.9816 211.8872 212.7930 213.6989 214.6051 215.5115 216.4180 217.3248 218.2317 219.1389 220.0462 220.9537 221.8614 222.7694 223.6774 224.5857 0.1% 204.4821 205.4115 206.3411 207.2708 208.2008 209.1309 210.0612 210.9916 211.9222 212.8530 213.7840 214.7151 215.6484 216.5779 217.5095 218.4413 219.3732 220.3053 221.2376 222.1700 223.1026 224.0354 224.9683 225.9013 226.8345 227.7679 228.7014 229.6351 230.5689 231.5029 232.4370 233.3712 234.3056 235.2402 236.1749 0.5% 214.7046 215.6616 216.6188 217.5760 218.5334 219.4910 220.4486 221.4064 222.3643 223.3224 224.2806 225.2388 226.1973 227.1558 228.1145 229.0733 230.0322 230.9912 231.9504 232.9097 233.8691 234.8286 235.7882 236.7480 237.7078 238.6678 239.6279 240.5881 341.5485 242.5089 243.4694 244.4301 245.3909 246.3518 247.3127 1.0% 220.5066 221.4799 222.4534 223.4270 224.4007 225.3745 226.3484 227.3224 228.2965 229.2707 230.2451 231.2195 232.1941 233.1687 234.1435 235.1183 236.0933 237.0683 238.0435 239.0188 239.9941 240.9696 241.9451 242.9208 243.8965 244.8724 245.8483 246.8244 247.8005 248.7767 249.7530 250.7294 251.7059 252.6825 253.6592 2.0% 227.8638 228.8589 229.8540 230.8493 231.8446 232.8401 233.8356 234.8312 235.8269 236.8226 237.8185 238.8144 239.8104 240.8065 241.8027 242.7990 243.7953 244.7917 245.7882 246.7848 247.7814 248.7781 249.7749 250.7718 251.7687 252.7658 253.7629 254.7600 255.7573 256.7546 257.7520 258.7494 259.7470 260.7445 261.7422 4.0% 237.9623 238.9892 240.0162 241.0432 242.0703 243.0975 244.1247 245.1520 246.1793 247.2067 248.2341 249.2616 250.2892 251.3168 252.3445 253.3722 254.4000 255.4278 256.4557 257.4836 258.5116 259.5397 260.5678 261.5959 262.6241 263.6524 264.6807 265.7090 266.7374 267.7659 268.7944 269.8229 270.8515 271.8802 272.9089 5.0% 242.1715 243.2123 244.2533 245.2942 246.3353 247.3763 248.4175 249.4586 250.4999 251.5411 252.5824 253.6238 254.6652 255.7067 258.7482 257.7897 258.8313 259.8730 260.9147 261.9564 262.9982 264.0400 265.0819 266.1238 267.1658 268.2078 269.2498 270.2919 271.3340 272.3762 273.4184 274.4606 275.5029 276.5453 277.5876
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-9
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311
Grade of Service 0.01% 225.4942 226.4028 227.3117 228.2207 229.1299 230.0393 230.9488 231.8585 232.7685 233.6785 234.5888 235.4992 236.4099 237.3206 238.2316 239.1427 240.0540 240.9655 241.8771 242.7889 243.7009 244.6130 245.5253 246.4378 247.3504 248.2632 249.1762 250.0893 251.0025 251.9160 252.8296 253.7433 254.6572 255.5713 258.4855 0.1% 237.1098 238.0447 238.9799 239.9152 240.8506 241.7861 242.7218 243.6577 244.5936 245.5298 246.4680 247.4024 248.3389 249.2756 250.2124 251.1493 252.0863 253.0235 253.9608 254.8983 255.8359 256.7736 257.7114 258.6494 259.5875 260.5257 261.4640 262.4025 263.3411 264.2798 265.2186 266.1576 267.0967 268.0359 268.9752 0.5% 248.2738 249.2351 250.1964 251.1578 252.1193 253.0809 254.0427 255.0045 255.9665 256.9285 257.8907 258.8529 259.8153 260.7777 261.7403 262.7030 263.6657 264.6286 265.5915 266.5546 267.5177 268.4810 269.4443 270.4077 271.3713 272.3349 273.2986 274.2624 275.2263 276.1903 277.1544 278.1186 279.0828 280.0472 281.0117 1.0% 254.6360 255.6129 256.5898 257.5669 258.5440 259.5212 260.4985 261.4759 262.4534 263.4309 264.4086 265.3863 266.3641 267.3420 268.3200 269.2981 270.2762 271.2545 272.2328 273.2112 274.1896 275.1682 276.1468 277.1255 278.1043 279.0832 280.0621 281.0412 282.0203 282.9994 283.9787 284.9580 285.9374 286.9169 287.8985 2.0% 262.7400 263.7378 264.7357 265.7336 266.7316 267.7297 268.7279 269.7261 270.7244 271.7227 272.7211 273.7196 274.7181 275.7168 276.7154 277.7142 278.7130 279.7118 280.7108 281.7097 282.7088 283.7079 284.7071 285.7063 286.7056 287.7050 288.7044 289.7038 290.7034 291.7030 292.7026 293.7023 294.7021 295.7019 296.7018 4.0% 273.9376 274.9664 275.9952 277.0241 278.0530 279.0820 280.1110 281.1401 282.1692 283.1983 284.2275 285.2588 286.2861 287.3154 288.3447 289.3742 290.4036 291.4331 292.4627 293.4922 294.5219 295.5515 296.5812 297.6110 298.6408 299.6708 300.7005 301.7304 302.7603 303.7903 304.8203 305.8504 306.8805 307.9107 308.9408 5.0% 278.6301 279.6725 280.7150 281.7575 282.8001 283.8427 284.8854 285.9281 286.9708 288.0135 289.0563 290.0992 291.1420 292.1850 293.2279 294.2709 295.3139 296.3570 297.4001 298.4432 299.4863 300.5295 301.5728 302.6160 303.6593 304.7027 305.7460 306.7894 307.8329 308.8763 309.9198 310.9633 312.0069 313.0505 314.0941
11-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346
Grade of Service 0.01% 257.3998 258.3144 259.2290 260.1439 261.0588 261.9740 262.8892 263.8047 264.7202 265.6359 266.5518 267.4678 268.3840 269.3003 270.2167 271.1333 272.0501 272.9669 273.8839 274.8011 275.7184 276.6358 277.5534 278.4711 279.3890 280.3070 281.2251 282.1433 283.0617 283.9803 284.8989 285.8177 286.7366 287.6557 288.5749 0.1% 269.9146 270.8542 271.7939 272.7337 273.6738 274.6138 275.5538 276.4940 277.4344 278.3749 279.3155 280.2562 281.1970 282.1380 283.0791 284.0202 284.9615 285.9029 286.8444 287.7860 288.7277 289.6695 290.6115 291.5535 292.4956 293.4379 294.3803 295.3227 296.2653 297.2079 298.1507 299.0936 300.0366 300.9797 301.9228 0.5% 281.9762 282.9408 283.9055 284.8703 285.8352 286.8002 287.7653 288.7304 289.6957 290.6610 291.6264 292.5919 293.5575 294.5231 295.4889 296.4547 297.4206 298.3866 299.3527 300.3188 301.2851 302.2514 303.2178 304.1843 305.1508 306.1174 307.0842 308.0510 309.0178 309.9848 310.9518 311.9189 312.8861 313.8533 314.8206 1.0% 288.8761 289.8558 290.8355 291.8154 292.7953 293.7753 294.7554 295.7355 298.7157 297.6960 298.6763 299.6567 300.6372 301.6178 302.5984 303.5791 304.5598 305.5407 306.5215 307.5025 308.4835 309.4646 310.4458 311.4270 312.4083 313.3896 314.3711 315.3525 316.3341 317.3157 318.2974 319.2791 320.2609 321.2428 322.2247 2.0% 297.7017 298.7017 299.7017 300.7018 301.7020 302.7022 303.7025 304.7028 305.7032 306.7036 307.7041 308.7046 309.7052 310.7059 311.7066 312.7073 313.7081 314.7089 315.7099 316.7108 317.7118 318.7129 319.7140 320.7151 321.7163 322.7176 323.7189 324.7202 325.7216 326.7231 327.7246 328.7261 329.7277 330.7294 331.7310 4.0% 309.9711 311.0013 312.0316 313.0619 314.0923 315.1227 316.1532 317.1836 318.2141 319.2447 320.2753 321.3059 322.3366 323.3672 324.3980 325.4287 326.4595 327.4904 328.5212 329.5521 330.5830 331.6140 332.6450 333.6760 334.7071 335.7382 336.7693 337.8007 338.8317 339.8629 340.8942 341.9255 342.9568 343.9881 345.0195 5.0% 315.1378 316.1815 317.2252 318.2690 319.3127 320.3566 321.4004 322.4443 323.4882 324.5321 325.5761 326.6201 327.6641 328.7082 329.7523 330.7964 331.8405 332.8847 333.9289 334.9731 336.0174 337.0617 338.1060 339.1503 340.1947 341.2391 342.2835 343.3279 344.3724 345.4169 346.4614 347.5060 348.5506 349.5952 350.6398
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381
Grade of Service 0.01% 289.4942 290.4137 291.3332 292.2530 293.1728 294.0928 295.0128 295.9331 296.8534 297.7739 298.6945 299.6152 300.5360 301.4570 302.3781 303.2993 304.2207 305.1421 306.0637 306.9854 307.9072 308.8291 309.7512 310.6734 311.5957 312.5181 313.4406 314.3632 315.2860 316.2089 317.1319 318.0550 318.9782 319.9015 320.8249 0.1% 302.8661 303.8095 304.7530 305.6966 306.6403 307.5840 308.5279 309.4719 310.4160 311.3602 312.3044 313.2488 314.1933 315.1378 316.0825 317.0272 317.9721 318.9170 319.8620 320.8072 321.7524 322.6977 323.6431 324.5886 325.5341 326.4798 327.4256 328.3714 329.3174 330.2634 331.2095 332.1557 333.1020 334.0484 334.9949 330.3078 331.2764 332.2450 333.2137 334.1825 335.1513 336.1202 337.0892 338.0582 339.0273 339.9965 340.9657 341.9350 342.9044 343.8738 355.8433 345.8129 346.7825 347.7522 348.7220 0.5% 315.7880 316.7555 317.7231 318.6907 319.6584 320.6262 321.5940 322.5619 323.5299 324.4980 325.4661 326.4343 327.4026 328.3709 1.0% 323.2067 324.1887 325.1708 326.1530 327.1352 328.1175 329.0999 330.0823 331.0647 332.0473 333.0298 334.0125 334.9952 335.9780 336.9608 337.9437 338.9266 339.9098 340.8926 341.8757 342.8589 343.8421 344.8254 345.8087 346.7921 347.7755 348.7590 349.7426 350.7262 351.7098 352.6935 353.6773 354.6811 355.6450 356.6289 2.0% 332.7328 333.7346 334.7364 335.7383 350.1769 351.2084 352.2400 353.2717 354.3033 355.3350 356.3667 343.7549 344.7572 345.7595 346.7618 347.7643 348.7667 349.7692 350.7717 351.7743 352.7770 353.7796 354.7823 355.7851 356.7879 357.7907 358.7936 359.7965 360.7995 361.8025 362.8055 363.8086 264.8117 365.8149 366.8181 4.0% 345.0509 347.0824 348.1138 349.1453 350.1769 351.2084 352.2400 353.2717 354.3033 355.3350 356.3667 357.3985 358.4302 359.4620 360.4939 361.5257 362.5576 363.5895 364.6215 365.6534 366.6854 367.7175 368.7495 369.7813 370.8137 371.8458 372.8780 373.9102 374.9424 375.9747 377.0069 378.0392 379.0715 380.1039 381.1363 5.0% 351.6845 352.7292 353.7739 354.8186 355.8634 356.9082 357.9530 358.9978 360.0427 361.0875 362.1325 363.1774 364.2223 365.2673 366.3123 367.3574 368.4024 369.4475 370.4926 371.5388 372.5829 373.6280 374.6732 375.7184 376.7637 377.8089 378.8542 379.8995 380.9448 381.9902 383.0356 384.0810 385.1264 386.1718 387.2173
11-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Erlang Tables
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang B
Offered Erl
No of Traffic Channels 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400
Grade of Service 0.01% 321.7485 322.6722 323.5959 324.5198 325.4438 326.3679 327.2922 328.2165 329.1409 330.0655 330.9901 331.9149 332.8398 333.7648 334.6898 335.6150 336.5403 337.4657 338.3912 0.1% 335.9414 336.8881 337.8348 338.7816 339.7285 340.6755 341.6226 342.5698 343.5170 344.4643 345.4117 346.3592 347.3068 348.2544 349.2022 350.1500 351.0979 352.0459 352.9939 0.5% 349.6918 350.6617 351.6316 352.6017 353.5717 354.5419 355.5121 356.4823 357.4527 358.4231 359.3935 360.3640 361.3346 362.3052 363.2759 364.2467 365.2175 366.1884 367.1593 1.0% 357.6129 358.5969 359.5810 360.5651 361.5493 362.5335 363.5178 364.5021 365.4865 366.4710 367.4555 368.4400 369.4246 370.4092 371.3939 372.3786 373.3634 374.3483 375.3331 2.0% 367.8213 368.8246 369.8279 370.8312 371.8346 372.8381 373.8415 374.8451 375.8486 376.8522 377.8558 378.8595 379.8632 380.8669 381.8707 382.8745 383.8784 384.8822 385.8862 4.0% 382.1687 383.2011 384.2335 385.2660 386.2985 387.3310 388.3636 389.3962 390.4288 391.4614 392.4940 393.5267 394.5594 395.5921 396.6249 397.6577 398.6905 399.7233 400.7561 5.0% 388.2627 389.3082 390.3538 391.3993 392.4449 393.4904 394.5360 395.5817 396.6273 397.6730 398.7187 399.7644 400.8101 401.8558 402.9016 403.9474 404.9932 406.0390 407.0849
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
11-13
Version 1 Rev 3
Erlang Tables
11-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 12
Answers
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-1
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
12-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
BTS Exercise Number 1 Answers
Firstly, we must work out the value for P: Total Erls in LAC Call hold time = = 1,000 120 secs
= = =
Value of P = 3.333
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-3
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
Thirdly we must now determine the number of AGCH to support the CELL:
= 2.025
12-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
NPAGCH =
Therefore we will require at least a minimum of 2 CCCH blocks to be provided to support the functionality of this cell.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-5
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
Secondly we can now calculate the quantity of erlangs offered. Erlangs offered:
Now utilizing the erlang B tables at 1% blocking we can convert2.566 Erls into the quantity of SDCCH blocks required 8 blocks
12-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-7
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
= 75,000 calls/hour With 20% of all calls expected to be MS terminated: 20% of 75000 = 15,000 2 pages for every call set up: Pages per hour = 30,000 Pages per second =
Value of P = 8.33 Now we can calculate the number of paging channels required:
12-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
= 816.75
= 0.7033 With this figure we can now calculate the number of AGCH blocks required:
= 3.22 blocks We will therefore require at least a minimum of 4 CCCH blocks to be provided to support the functionality of this sector.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-9
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
= 594
= 1.3365 With this figure we can now calculate the number of AGCH blocks required:
= 3.44 Blocks We will therefore require at least a minimum of 4 CCCH blocks to be provided to support the functionality of this sector.
12-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
= 445.5
= 0.3836 With this figure we can now calculate the number of AGCH blocks required:
= 0.0451 With this figure we can now calculate the number of CCCH blocks required: NPAGCH =
= 3.1 blocks
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
We will therefore require at least a minimum of 4 CCCH blocks to be provided to support the functionality of this sector.
12-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
= 4.991 Erlangs Therefore utilising the Erlang B table @ 1% blocking the quantity of SDCCHs in Sector A will be: 11 BLOCKS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-13
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
= 10.23 Erlangs Therefore utilising the Erlang B table @ 1% blocking the quantity of SDCCHs in Sector B will be: 18 BLOCKS Sector C Erlangs offered:
= 2.7225 Erlangs Therefore utilising the Erlang B table @ 1% blocking the quantity of SDCCHs in Sector C will be: 8 BLOCKS
12-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
5 CTUs required
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
4 CTUs required NOTE This is going to be fully occupied from day 1. The decision to upgrade is yours.
12-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
3 CTUs required NOTE This is going to be fully occupied from day 1. The decision to upgrade is yours.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
Sector A: 5 CTUs Sector B: 4 CTUs Sector C: 3 CTUs This gives a grand total of: 12 CTUs Stage 6 Horizon Range of Equipment We must therefore use a configuration of 2 Horizonmacro cabinets. The diagram opposite shows a possible configuration for the cabinets. It must also be remembered whether it is an outdoor or indoor installation.
12-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
CAB 0
Tx/Rx
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
CAB 1
Tx/Rx Tx/Rx
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A
Rx
B
Tx/Rx
A
Tx/Rx
LOAD PLATE
DCF
Rx Rx
DDF
DDF
Rx Rx
DCF
DCF
5 4 3
Rx
CTUs
CTUs
CTUs
CTUs
CTUs
CTUs
3 Carrier Cell
4 Carrier Cell
A L A R M D B
M C U F B
M C U F A
B P S M N I U 0 B P S M
A L A R M D B 2
F M U x F M U x
B P S M B P S M
REDUNDANT
MASTER
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-19
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
1 timeslot @ 64 kbit/s for the RSL As we have 12 CTUs: A total of 24 timeslots @ 64 kbits is required to cater for them 25 timeslots @ 64 kbit/s = 1 x 2.048Mbit/s bearer
12-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
With full redundancy between BTS 3 and BTS 4 we will need 26 timslots at 64 kbit/s, therefore requiring 1 x 2 Mbit/s link. BTS 3 - BTS 1 Again we will need a total of 26 timeslots @ 64 kbit/s, offering full redundancy. We will require 1 x 2 Mbit/s link. BTS 4 - BTS 1 Again we will need a total of 26 timeslots @ 64 kbit/s offering full redundancy. We will require 1 x 2 Mbit/s link. BTS 2 - BTS 1 We require a total of 13 timeslots @ 64 kbit/s. We will therefore require 1 x 2 Mbit/s link. BSC - BTS1 The total number of 64 kbit/s timeslots required by BTS 1 again is 13. However the total number of 64 kbit/s timeslots required between BSC and BTS 1 is the total of all BTS sites. Therefore, BTS 3 - BTS 1= BTS 4 - BTS 1= BTS 2 BTS1= BTS 1 - BSC= Grand Total= 78 Timeslots @ 64 kbit/s. The number of 2 Mbit/s link required is 3. This is offering full redundancy. 26 Timeslots 26 Timeslots 13 Timeslots 13 Timeslots
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-21
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
12-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
= 0.445 + 0.063 + 0.18 =0.688 1 LCF GPROCs BSP + 1 RED LCF MTL Pool GPROC CSFP Total = 2 1 2 1 1 7 GPROCS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-23
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
However, as these parameters are fairly typical we can therefore deduce: 367 traffic channels = 3 MTLs @ 20% utilization Stage 3 The number of 2.048 Mbit/s links between the XCDR and the BSC is as follows: 3 MTLs (C7 signalling channels) @ 64 kbit/s 1 OML control channel @ 64 kbit/s 1 XBL signalling channel @ 64 kbit/s. 367 traffic channels @ 16 kbit/s.
12-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Answers
Version 1 Rev 3
= 1.097 2 LCFs Stage 5 Determine the number of GPROC2s. BSP active BSP redundant LCFs for RSL control LCFs for MTL control Pool GPROC Total: Stage 6 24 BTS with 8 x 3 BTS closed loops. For BTS connectivity we will require 16 ports = 8 MSI cards We also require 4 x 2.048 Mbit/s links to the XCDR located at the MSC. A further 2 MSI cards are required to support this. Grand total of 10 MSI cards required. 1 1 2 2 1 7 GPROC2s
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
12-25
Version 1 Rev 3
Answers
12-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Chapter 13
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-1
Version 1 Rev 3
13-2
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
A Interface - AUTO
A Interface Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on the use of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on these links can be used for traffic or signalling. Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND and Ki. A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8. Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that produces ciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc. Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc using RAND and Ki. See Access Burst. Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offers a GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. The Motorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic and thus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS. Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to total number of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reflects the performance of the total network AC-DC Power Supply module. Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when charge carriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse their direction of movement. Household utility current in most countries is AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cycles per second). The RF current in antennas and transmission lines is another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal, square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregular or complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced by certain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPS when it is operating from its battery. Access Class (C0 to C15). Application Context. Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congested switches automatically communicate their congestion level to other switches. The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call. Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated with TCH or DCCH. ACKnowledgement.
ABR
ac-dc PSM ac
AC AC ACC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-3
Version 1 Rev 3
ACM
Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained within the SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) for both the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons, the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented, not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible after entering PIN2. Address Complete Message. AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS equipment. AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment. Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of the three Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in the application layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to the lower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a title for identification. See also ASI and ROSE. Antenna Combining Unit. Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC. ADministration Centre. Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signal that is a function of a continuous variable into a representative number sequence carrying equivalent information. Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-oriented data-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point and point-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that contain error-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembles high-level data link control (HDLC). ADMinistration processor. ADMINistration. Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephone service feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits to access a network than are required under the nominal numbering plan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequently dialled numbers. Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differential pulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithm is adjusted in accordance with specific characteristics of the input signal. Application Entity. The system-independent application activities that are made available as application services to the application agent. Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power level of an echo or the elimination of an echo. Additional Elementary Functions. Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the Events Log in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscription lists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they are re-routed to different subscription lists.
ADCCP
ADPCM
AE
13-4
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
AFC
Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintains the frequency of an oscillator within the specified limits with respect to a reference frequency. Absolute Frame Number. Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to assign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH. Action indicator. Artificial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goal is to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of the characteristics of human intelligence. Among these properties are logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to make decisions based on past experience or insufficient or conflicting information, and the ability to understand natural language. Alarm Interface Board. A class of processor. The radio link between the BTS and the MS. See Application Layer. Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of a carrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristic of the modulating signal. Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service feature that automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls. Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-rates of 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the air interface. Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A message broadcast to all MSs in a cell. American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the primary organisation for fostering the development of technology standards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groups and is the U. S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long established computer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI. A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RF and vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RF signals between the BTS and MS. Advice of Charge. Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service. Advice of Charge Information supplementary service. Automatic Output Control. Application Process.
AFN AGC
AGCH Ai AI
AMA AMR
AM/MP ANSI
Antenna
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-5
Version 1 Rev 3
Application Layer
See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of seven hierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs common application services for, the application processes. It also issues requests to the Presentation Layer. The common application services provide semantic conversion between associated application processes. Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM available frequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into 200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between 8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCN for one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come around again. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMA frame. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called a physical channel. Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission in which the receiver detects transmission errors in a message and automatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter. Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds a Network Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physical hardware address, e.g., Ethernet address. Association Control Service Element. An ASE which provides an AP with the means to establish and control an association with an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentation layer (OMC). American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a standard developed by ANSI to define how computers write and read characters. It is the most common format for text files in computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII file, alphabetic, numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binary digit binary number. 128 possible characters are defined. UNIX and DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) use ASCII for text files. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode. IBMs System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code called extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversion programs allow different operating systems to change a file from one code to another. Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integrated functions to help accomplish application communication, e.g., within an application entity (AE). Application Specific Entity (TCAP). Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation used for describing data transmitted by telecommunications protocols, regardless of language implementation and physical representation of these data, whatever the application, whether complex or very simple. Alarm and Status Panel. Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that are completed successfully. All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks (paths) in a given trunk group are busy. The interface between XCDR and BSC.
ARFCN
ARQ
ARP
ASCE
ASCII
ASE
ASE ASN.1
13-6
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
ATI ATM
Antenna Transceiver Interface. Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilising fixed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of traffic. ATTach. Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality of telephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can be initiated by either an operator command or by a command file, which can be activated at a predetermined time. Access Unit. Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides the functionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested by the system. Often a part of the HLR. AUThentication. AUTOmatic mode.
AU AUC
AUT(H) AUTO
B Interface - Byte
B Interface BA BAIC BAOC Baud Interface between MSC and VLR. BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in a cell for BCCH transmission. Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service. Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service. The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signalling rate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is one symbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. This coincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation with no framing or stop bits Battery Backup Board. Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which each transceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency, and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst. Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of the BSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. See also NCC and BSIC. Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used to broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or sector basis. Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by a unique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits. Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digital control circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites this is a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is located in the BTS cabinet. Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data, when used at full capacity.
BBBX BBH
BCC
BCCH
BCD BCF
B channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-7
Version 1 Rev 3
BCIE
Bearer Capability Information Element. Specific GSM parameters in the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling to the network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request a bearer service (BS) from the network. Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS which provides the base control function at a BTS site. The term no longer applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU). Base Controller Unit Power. Bit Error Probability. Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over some stipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefficient and a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000 bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5. Business Exchange Services. Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decoded speech frames. See FER. Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minute period during which occurs the maximum total traffic load in a given 24-hour period. Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that a switch processes during a BH. See also BH. Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service. Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits. See also T43. Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the Home PLMN Country supplementary service. See Reciprocal neighbour.. Balanced-line Interconnect Module. From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information. Also, a name for a directory that contain files stored in binary format. BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databases and software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS. Block Error Rate BiLLiNG. Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two states or digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two. Also, a unit of storage capacity. Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed. The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in one second. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link which transfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at 8 bps. A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which a parity check procedure is applied for error control purposes. Full rate traffic channel. See also Full Rate.
BCU
BES BFI BH
BHCA BI BIB
bit/s
block Bm
13-8
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
BN BPF
Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular bit period within a timeslot. Bandpass Filter. A filter that ideally passes all frequencies between two non-zero finite limits and bars all frequencies not within the limits. BCU Power Supply Module. Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interface allowing simultaneous voice and data services provided over two clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/s channel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D. Base Station. See BSS. Basic Service (group). Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service that provides the capability for the transmission of signals between user-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used to support a bearer service may be identical to that used to support other types of telecommunication service. Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMN which has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. The BSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS) but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs (see BCF, BCU, and BSU). Basic Service Group. Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. It is a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguish between different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is an octet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC) and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). The remaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC. BSIC of an adjacent cell. Base Site control Processor (at BSC). Backward Sequence Number. A field in a signal unit (SU) that contains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctly received signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that is being returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU. Base Station System. The system of base station equipment (Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by the MSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08 series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible for communicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. If an internal interface is implemented according to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then the BSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs. BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAP and BSSMAP messages. Supports message communication between the MSC and BSS. Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which houses one or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at a remote transcoder (RXCDR).
BPSM BRI
BS BS BS
BSC
BSG BSIC
BSS
BSSAP
BSSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-9
Version 1 Rev 3
BSSMAP
Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchanged between the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages. BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7). Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digital control modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (part of BSSC cabinet). British Telecom. Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reflections on the bus, each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginning and at its end with the characteristic impedance. Bus Terminator Card. Base Transceiver Function. Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic task groups within the GPROC. Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSM PLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. The BTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs). A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physical content of a timeslot. A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit. Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. A byte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in a data store or memory.
BSSOMAP BSU
BT BT
Burst Byte
C - CW
C C Interface C7 CA CA CAB CADM Conditional. Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC. See SS7. Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to a particular cell. Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS. Cabinet. Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used within DataGen to create new country and network files in the DataGen database. Charge Advice Information. Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola Cell Optimization product. It is intended for engineering staff and OMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSM network cell performance. Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells configured for GPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this process sends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable to the appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved to an INS (IN Service) PRP.
CAI CAT
CB
13-10
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS. Circuit Breaker. Cell Broadcast Agent. Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMS messages. Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcast messages to all MSs in a specific cell. Combining Bandpass Filter. Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allows communications between the BSS and the CBC. Circuit Breaker Module. Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlike competing systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA does not assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, every channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence. Cell Broadcast Message Identifier. Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS. Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a number of unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSs within a particular region. The content may include information such as local traffic conditions, the weather, the phone number of the local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBC via a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcast channel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outside the PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, a BSC is only connected to one CBC. Clock Bus. Connection Confirm. Part of SCCP network connectivity. Country Code. A one to three digit number which specifically identifies a country of the world that an international call is being routed to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom). Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations and routeing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunks are performed by the MSC. Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These, with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. The second card may be used for redundancy. Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service. Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channels used to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH, and RACH. Group of MSs in idle mode. Common Channel Distributor. Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor.
CBUS CC CC
CC
CCB
CCBS CCCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-11
Version 1 Rev 3
Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC. Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carry system management messages. Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSM Recommendations). Comit Consultatif International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique. This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS. Current Call Meter. Capability/Configuration Parameter. Control Channel Protocol Entity. Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred seconds is one CCS. Also, a measure of traffic load obtained by multiplying the number of calls per hour by the average holding time per call expressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practice to mean hundred call seconds per hour with per hour" implied; as such, it is a measure of traffic intensity. See also erlang. Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions: Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radio channel measurement functions, including received quality level, received signal level, and information related to timing advance measurements. Circuit. Control Driver Board. Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software (crontab - cron job file). Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, which includes calling and called numbers, local and remote node names, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure class fields. This is the information needed to bill the customer for calls and facility usage data for calls. Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Chargeable DURation. Control Equalizer Board (BTS). Called station identifier. Central Equipment Identity Register. By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At an omni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell is synonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systems where cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below)
CCU
13-12
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
CEND
End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, party stops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalent procedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path. Confrence des administrations Europennes des Postes et Telecommunications. Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identifies when discontinuity is detected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to the OMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specified threshold. The alarm identifies the RCI or CIC and the path where the error is detected. Conversion Facility. Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephone user whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorised subscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorised subscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number. See also CFC and CFU. Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility management functions and OA&M functions for the GSN module. Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phone busy situations. Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or not reachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy. Configuration Fault Management RSS process. Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for not reachable situations. Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations. Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects all incoming calls. Charging Gateway.
CEPT CERM
CF CF
CF CFB
CFC
CFM CFNRc
CFNRy CFU CG
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-13
Version 1 Rev 3
CGF Channel
Charging Gateway Function. A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence of periods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a defined frequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence of periods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system. Coaxial Interconnect Module. See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modes that are currently used. CHarging Point. Card Holder Verification information. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number which is associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensure authentication consistency between the MS and the VLR. Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within a location area. CUG Index. Carrier to Interference ratio. Circuit Identity Code. The unique identifier of the terrestrial portion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s connection depending on whether a site has local or remote transcoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a complete E1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding, occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot. Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal power level relative to the interference power level. Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIP and CLIR. Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR. Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service. Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party. See also CLIP. Clock. Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributes GCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc). ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control over the BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is, messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call). This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting and circuit blocking. CLeaR. Configuration Management. Configuration management allows the operator to perform network configuration tasks, and to maintain all details of the network configuration at the OMC. Connection Management. See CLM.
CI CI C/I CIC
CLR CM
CM
13-14
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
CM CMD CMM
Connectionless Manager. See CLM. CoMmanD. Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request a channel mode change. When it has received the CMM message, the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replies with a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicating the new channel mode. Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used for communication over the OML. Common Management Information Service Element. An ASE which provides a means to transfer management information via CMIP messages with another NE over an association established by ASCE using ROSE (OMC). Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates. CalliNg tone. Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into a digital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa. Manufacturers name for a type of multiplexer and packet switch commonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R. A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-located neighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type, but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell. COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See also COLP and COLR. Placed together; two or more items together in the same place. An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signals from another cell. COnnected Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of the connected party. See also COLR. COnnected Line Identification Restriction supplementary service. Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from the calling party. See also COLP. Code Object Manager (software). COMplete. Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combine transmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna. COMMunications. Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IP routeing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complex E1 interfaces to the public data network. Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link. See cPCI. CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls. CONFIGuration Control Program.
CMIP CMISE
COLR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-15
Version 1 Rev 3
Congestion CONNACK
Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all the service it is requesting. CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronization process. After a connection has been established, the CONNACK message indicates that traffic channels are available. Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS to BSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated calls and inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers. Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standards that define a common card cage, power supplies, and processor boards. CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the paging messages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS. Code and Puncturing Scheme. Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controls the interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portion of a digital communications switch that executes programmed instructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations on signals, and controls input/output functions. Command/Response field bit. Carriage Return (RETURN). Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to the MSC to establish a connection. See also CREF. Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that (a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digital signals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and (c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the received digital signal. Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishing a call in the event of a radio link failure. Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). In a number of operating circumstances, a CREF message may be sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a Connection Request (CR). Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activates timeslots and subchannels on the available carriers. Cell Resource Machine. Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speed modem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used to interwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32, or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards. Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of a customer site implementation of a new product, software release, or combination of products/releases. Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal). Circuit Switched. GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH).
CP
cPCI
C/R CR CR
CRC
CRE CREF
CRO
CRT CS CS-1
13-16
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
GPRS Coding Scheme-2 (13.4 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-3 (15.6 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-4 (21.4 kbit/s per TCH). Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROC device which facilitates the propagating of new software instances with reduced system down time. See also IP. Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC. Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly available communications network using circuit switched digital data circuits. Call Transfer supplementary service. Channel Tester. Channel Type. Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operators of GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune and optimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to be analysed and decoded. Control Terminal Port. Common Technical Regulation. Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to a transmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed. Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS. Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio). Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is used to control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating a unique group. When a CUG is configured for an interface, only those subscribers that are members of the same CUG can receive/place calls. The total value for an entire statistical interval. Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature which allows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in a call to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. The user has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate the existing conversation and respond to the second call.
CSP CSPDN
CT CT CT CTP
CTU CUG
Cumulative value CW
D Interface - DYNET
D Interface D/A DAB DAC DACS DAK Interface between VLR and HLR. Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC. Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet). Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an input number sequence into a function of a continuous variable. Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator and organizer for Tl / El based systems. Downlink Acknowledgement
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-17
Version 1 Rev 3
Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC). Data Acquisition System. Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/format that maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROM medium/format. Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola offline BSS binary object configuration tool. See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from the Network Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities and to detect and possibly correct errors that may occur in the Physical Layer. Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numeric quantities. See also dBm. DataBase. Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst). DataBase Administration/Database Administrator. A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt. DataBase Management System. Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of the current can vary with time, but the general direction of movement stays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is used in reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses. Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU). Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channels used to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH, FACCH, and SACCH. Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal defined by the RS-232-C specification that indicates that a device such as a modem is on-line and ready for transmission. Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performs functions such as signal conversion and coding, at the network end of the line between the DTE and the line. Also, The RS232 configuration designated for computers. DCE equipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straight cable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable. Data Communications Function. Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling and connection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channel can also be used to carry user data. Data Communications Network. A DCN connects Network Elements with internal mediation functions or mediation devices to the Operations Systems. DC Power Supply Module.
DCB DCCH
DCD
DCE
DCN
DC PSM
13-18
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
DCS1800
Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone network using digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, but operating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and 1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit). Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). The DDF is an integrated combiner, filter and duplexer. DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and output files. Data Drive Storage. Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highly accurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency over a wide range), low-distortion output waveforms. Diversity Equalizer Board. DETach. Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function. The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold by using error feedback. Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant data relating to a specified problem and copies it to tape or file, together with a problem description. The file or tape is then sent to Motorola for analysis. Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device located at Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slave Horizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents is responsible for providing DRI and carrier support. Drum Intercept Announcer. Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). DISConnect. Discontinuous. Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase. Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS. Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer. See Downlink. Data Link Connection Identifier. In frame-relay transmission systems, 13-bit field that defines the destination address of a packet. The address is local on a link-by-link basis. Data Link Discriminator. Diversity Low Noise Block. DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames into RLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface. Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP and a shelf GPROC. Digital Link Signalling Processor. Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).
DGT
DHP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-19
Version 1 Rev 3
DMA DMA
Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA). Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device, such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passing through the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory at high speeds with no processor overhead. Digital Mobile Radio. Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas networked EMX family). Directory Number. Data Network Identifier Code. In the CCITT International X.121 format, the first four digits indicate the international data number, the next three digits are the data country code, and the final digit is the network code. Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logical domain or equipment names to IP addresses. Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MS receives). Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument that interrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determined by the selected digit and the operating characteristics of the instrument. Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) destination point of the message. Digital Processing and Control board. Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal is sampled and the difference between the actual value of each sample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sample or samples, is quantified and converted, by encoding, to a digital signal. Note: There are several variations of differential pulse-code modulation. Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABX interface). Dual Path Preselector. BTS module. Dual Port Random Access Memory. Data PROCessor. Digital Power Supply Module. Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductor memory in which the information is stored in capacitors on a integrated circuit. Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits. Part of IWF. Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS. Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding and encryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS.
DNS Downlink DP
DPC
DPC DPCM
DRC
DRCU DRI
13-20
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extra memory. DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU. Part of the BSS. Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically and automatically switching the MS receiver on and off. Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal level 1). Term used to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U. S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe) digital signal carried on a T1 facility. German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface). Data Switching Exchange. Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relies on the pauses between speech bursts to provide additional compression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1 compression on the average on their line. 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1. Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computer processing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematical processing. Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interface signalling. Diversity Signal Strength Indication. Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly between the MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS. Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument that converts user information into signals for transmission or reconverts the received signals into user information. Also, the RS232 configuration designated for terminals. DTE equipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but to other DTE equipment only with a null modem. Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunk interface equipment. DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Digital Trunk Interface. Dual Transer Mode. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in which specified combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tone telephone makes when it dials a number. Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of flow control (RS232 Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTE to the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE is ready to transmit data. Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro (M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)).
DS-1
DSO DSP
DTE
DTR
DTRX
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-21
Version 1 Rev 3
DTX, DTx
Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducing interference by automatically switching the transmitter off when no speech or data are to be sent. A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is a defined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummy burst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information is to be delivered to a channel. DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamic resources.
Dummy burst
DYNET
E - EXEC
E E1 See Erlang. Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by European CEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voice or data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/s channel for framing and maintenance. Interface between MSC and MSC. External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Door open, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder. External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoring of all customer-defined environmental alarms at a site. The customer defines the alarm string and the severity of the alarms based on the individual requirements of the site. Indications are provided when the alarms are set or cleared. Energy per Bit/Noise floor, where Eb is the signal energy per bit and No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth. Elementary Basic Service Group. Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits. If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hears the voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delay introduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms). Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels (EC). The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division. Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sending machine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times. Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density. Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about the number and type of events and alarms generated throughout the network. It extracts data from the event log files for specified dates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual network elements, groups of elements, or the whole network. Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables a user to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in a telephone call and leave the connection himself. Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution.
E Interface EA EAS
Eb/No EBCG EC
ECT
EDGE
13-22
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
EEL EEPROM
Electric Echo Loss. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. An EEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM, EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. Enhanced GPRS. Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a further range of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs can use the extended frequency band as well as the primary band, while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band. A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrier hardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915 MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit). Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI. Electronic Industries Alliance. Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralized database for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists of IMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are known to have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIs which have been reported stolen or which are to be denied service for some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems (for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufficiently significant to warrant a black listing. Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product of the power supplied to an antenna and its gain. Equipment Identity Register Procedure. Echo Loss. Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides a centralised facility for reporting network-wide generated events and alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network. ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment, and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operate in their intended operational environments without suffering unacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradation because of electromagnetic radiation or response. Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from a source that produces a flow of electricity in a circuit; expressed in volts. Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. This service has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedence involves assigning a priority level to a call in combination with fast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources, which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher level precedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emption can also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lower precedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence. Electrical Man Machine Interface.
EGPRS EGSM900
EI EIA EIR
EIRP EIRP EL EM
EMC
EMF
EMI
eMLPP
EMMI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-23
Version 1 Rev 3
EMX en bloc
Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas MSC family). Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme); En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system to another ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the same time as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending. A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all the digits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the next system. All the digits are then sent as a group. Enhanced One-Phase End of Tape. EGPRS Packet Channel Request. Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type of memory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to re-program the memory. Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earth cabinets. Static model against which the performance of the equalizer is tested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250. Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slots each with equalizing circuitry and a DSP. Equalizer Control Processor. Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor. The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though the transmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary with frequency. An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or phase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provide equalization. International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined as the ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is available for occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this is also known as a traffic unit (TU). Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antenna multiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction. ERRor. Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for an anti-static wrist strap. Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMS programming interface language. Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended).
Equalizer
Erlang
13-24
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Ethernet
A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband local area network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method, implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishing the physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network. ETSI Technical Report. European Telecommunication Standard. European Telecommunications Standards Institute. End of Transmission. Executive Process.
FA FA FAC FACCH
FC-AL
FCCH
FCP FCS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-25
Version 1 Rev 3
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique that uses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of data for transmission over a communications medium. FDM assigns a discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and then combines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission. Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequency division to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissions to a single transponder. Fixed Dialling Number. The fixed dialling feature limits dialling from the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIM card. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchanges or full phone numbers. Fault Diagnostic Procedure. Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors by transmitting additional information with the original bit stream. If an error is detected, the additional information is used to recreate the original information. Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driver that stores data in its own database about all of the sites in the system. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It can also interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually or automatically at pre-defined times. Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded good speech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames. For Further Study. See Frequency Hopping. Frequency Hopping Indicator. Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part. The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit together with the forward sequence number and backward sequence number are used in the basic error control method to perform the signal unit sequence control and acknowledgement functions. Memory logic device in which the information placed in the memory in a given order is retrieved in that order. Finite Impulse Response (filter type). Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign key indicates an index into another table. Fault Management (at OMC). Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneous frequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart from the centre frequency by an amount proportional to the instantaneous value of the modulating signal. Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMIC alarm is received, the fault management software for the network item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. See also Intermittent and OIC. Fibre optic MUltipleXer module.
FDMA
FDN
FDP FEC
FEP
FIFO FIR FK FM FM
FMIC
FMUX
13-26
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
FN FOA
Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMA frame within a hyperframe. First Office Application. A full functional verification of new product(s) on a commercial system using accepted technology and approved test plans. Fibre Optic eXtender board. See Full Rate. Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statistically multiplexed packet-switched data communications in which (a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completely enclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmission rates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate). A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots containing samples from all channels of a group, where the position of each sample is identified by reference to a frame alignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure which allows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel. The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is synchronized with respect to that of the received signal to accomplish accurate data extraction. Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can be easily replaced in the field with a few simple tools. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easily within an MS burst. The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmission according to a specified algorithm. Frequency hopping improves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network. Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using different frequencies and interference coming from neighbour cells transmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced. Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timing signals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillator in the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized to the recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link. MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization burst transmitted from the BTS site. Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radio signal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. The FSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and the distance the radio signal has travelled from the point source. Forward Sequence Number. See FIB. File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE which provides a means to transfer information from file to file. (OMC). forwarded-to number. Fault Translation Process (in BTS).
FOX FR FR
Frame
Frame Alignment
Frequency Hopping
FS
FSL
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-27
Version 1 Rev 3
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allows a user on one computer to transfer files to and from another computer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program the user executes to transfer files. Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSM air interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See also HR - Half Rate.
Full Rate
G Interface - GWY
G Interface Gateway MSC Interface between VLR and VLR. An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMN from another network or service. A gateway MSC is also an interrogating node for incoming PLMN calls. Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes. Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to the Gigabit Ethernet. Gb Link. Gb Manager. Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Group Call Register. The register which holds information about VGCS or VBS calls. Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with the XCDR board. GDP board configured for E1 link usage. GDP board configured for T1 link usage. GPRS Data Stream. Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internet working with external packet-switched networks. Giga-Hertz (109). Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify a users primary group. GPRS Initialization Process GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC). GPRS Mobility Management. General Manual Revision. Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See Gateway MSC. Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation technique used in GSM. GrouND.
GB, Gbyte GBIC GBL GBM GCLK GCR GDP GDP E1 GDP T1 GDS GGSN GHz GID GIP GMB GMM GMR GMSC GMSK GND
13-28
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
GOS
Grade of Service. A traffic statistic defined as the percentage of calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay. An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentage of calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned a voice channel. GSM PLMN Area. General Protocol Converter. Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmission technique that does not set up a continuous channel from a portable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, but transmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efficient use of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for the volume of data sent and received. Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determining position on the Earths surface by comparing radio signals from several satellites. Gb Router. GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reached by a fixed subscriber, without the subscribers knowledge of the location of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served by several GSM PLMNs. GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessible by GSM MSs. GSM Systems Division. GPRS Signalling Link. Groupe Spcial Mobile (the committee). Global System for Mobile communications (the system). See PGSM. GSM Mobile Station. GSM Public Land Mobile Network. GSM Radio Frequency. GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided by the SGSN and GGSN. A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNs connected to a single CommHub. GSM Software Release.
GPRS
GPS
GR GSA
GSA GSD GSL GSM GSM GSM900 GSM MS GSM PLMN GSM RF GSN GSN Complex GSR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-29
Version 1 Rev 3
GT
Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7 messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete message routing, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code and subsystem number. Gb Transmit Manager. Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allows users to display and edit MCDF input files. GBRS TBF Scheduler Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MS transmission is attenuated. Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or program that displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options. These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorial symbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by means of which users may enter commands. A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUI application which is being run on a GUI server. A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application process running locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUI clients or other MMI processors). GateWay Manager. GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.
GWM GWY
H Interface - Hyperframe
H Interface H-M HAD, HAP Half Rate Interface between HLR and AUC. Human-Machine Terminals. HLR Authentication Distributor. Refers to a type of data channel that will double the current GSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier (see also FR - Full Rate). HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows established calls to continue by switching them to another radio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area to another. Handovers may take place between the following GSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC. Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part of the DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to be combined into a single antenna. High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used to facilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet. Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol for CCITT Recommendation X.25. High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a data transmission mechanism which supports duplex high speed digital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshielded twisted pair lines.
HANDO, Handover
HCU
HDLC
HDSL
13-30
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
HLC
High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information defining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice active on the terminal. Home Location Register. The LR where the current location and all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored. Heat Management System. The system that provides environmental control of the components inside the ExCell, TopCell and M-Cell cabinets. HandOver. See HANDO. Hand Portable Unit. A handset. Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows the subscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call. When the second call is completed, the subscriber can return to the first call. Home PLMN. See Half Rate. HandSet. High Speed Interface card. HLR Subscriber Management. Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating the specific hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. It ranges from 0 to 63. Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50. Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by the HPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the home country. Hardware. A combiner device which requires no software control and is sufficiently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitter frequency band. See also COMB. A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to 4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-line telephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece and mouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit that connects the phone to the exchange. 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of the frame structure.
HLR HMS
HO HPU HOLD
HT100
HU
HW Hybrid Combiner
Hybrid Transformer
Hyperframe
I - IWU
I IA Information frames. Part of RLP. Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outside the CUG. International Alphanumeric 5 character set.
IA5
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-31
Version 1 Rev 3
IADU
Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is the equivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-date the M-Cell range. Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forward direction that contains (a) address information, (b) the signaling information required to route and connect a call to the called line, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating to user and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity or call-receiver identity. Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoring all cabinet alarms at a BSS. Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists of many individual circuit elements, such as transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active and passive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip of semiconducting material and mounted on a single piece of substrate material. Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identifies a CUG within a network. Interlock Code of the preferential CUG. Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from receiving calls from other members of that group. Integrated Circuit(s) Card. In-Call Modification. Function which allows the service mode (speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call. Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the Internet Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages, test packets, and informational messages related to IP. The PING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internet connection. IDentification/IDentity/IDentifier. Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digital transmission and digital switching. Interface Design Specification. Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational database management system. Information Element. The part of a message that contains configuration or signalling information. International Electrotechnical Commission. An international standards and conformity assessment body for electrical, electronic and related technologies. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-profit, technical professional association. Information Element Identifier. The identifier field of the IE. Interim European Telecommunication Standard. Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrier frequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmission or reception.
IAM
IAS IC
IC IC(pref) ICB
13-32
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
IFAM IM
Initial and Final Address Message. InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of a system, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and difference frequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof that are transmitted through the element. Intelligent Monitor And Control System. International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronic serial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece or assembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along with request for service. See also IMEISV. International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software Version number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal number composed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type Approval Code; - a 2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit Serial Number; and - a 2 digit Software Version Number (SVN). The first three elements comprise the IMEI. When the network requests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also sent towards the network. See also IMEI and SVN. IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from the network to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediately start monitoring a specified channel. International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile number (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription. It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such as directory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN. Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality to be distributed flexibly at a variety of nodes on and off the network and allows the architecture to be modified to control the services. Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR, to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC. IN Service. Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using the capabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN. Interference Algorithm. Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associated with a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms are displayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle and clear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of an intermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC. The general term used to describe the inter-operation of networks, services, supplementary services and so on. See also IWF. A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged. The end of an interval. Input/Output. Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the network quality. The IOS generates reports based on performance data from the BTS and OMC-R.
IMACS IMEI
IMEISV
IMM
IMSI
IN
Interworking
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-33
Version 1 Rev 3
IP
Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible for bringing up the site from a reset, including code loading the site from a suitable code source. IP also provides the CSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to be swapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service as soon as possible. Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer communication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks. See also TCP and TCP/IP. Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between one process and another, either within the same computer or over a network. INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spurious emission. Intellectual PRoperty. Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V). Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is a datagram protocol used for connectionless communications. Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recovery services. Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ) A communications system comprising a constellation of 66 low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wireless system allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from any location in the world. The satellite constellation is connected to existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number of gateway ground-stations. Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managing the way a computer accesses records and files stored on a hard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides direct access to specific records through an index. This combination results in quick data access regardless of whether records are being accessed sequentially or randomly. International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/from other countries. Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using common switches and digital transmission paths to establish connections for various services such as telephony, data telex, and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel. Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX). International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is a world-wide federation of national standards bodies from some 130 countries, one from each country.
IP
IPC
IR Iridium
ISAM
ISC ISDN
ISG ISO
13-34
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
ISQL ISS
An Interactive Structured Query Language client application for the database server. See also IDS. Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netra t 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functions for the GSN. Integrated System Test. ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported by signalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down. Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer Capability Element which is provided on the Dm channel to support Terminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures. International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications. It is responsible for adopting international treaties, regulations and standards governing telecommunications. International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardization Sector. The standardization functions were formerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU. InterWorking Function. A network functional entity which provides network interworking, service interworking, supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking. It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in a GSM PLMN. InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/from SGSN. InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visa versa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.
ITU
ITU-T
IWF
IWMSC IWU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-35
Version 1 Rev 3
k - KW
k k K KAIO kb, kbit kbit/s, kbps kbyte Kc kHz Ki KIO KPI KSW KSWX kW kilo (103). Windows size. Constraint length of the convolutional code. Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-R relational database management system. kilo-bit. kilo-bits per second. kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls the operation of encipherment and decipherment. kilo-Hertz. Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of the authentication process of the AUC. A class of processor. Key Performance Indicator. Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connect calls. Part of the BSS. KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDM bus. Part of the BSS. kilo-Watt.
L1 - LV
L1 L2 L2ML Layer 1 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer 2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRX and BCF. Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF that adapts a users known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP for transmission between the MT and IWF. L2R Bit Orientated Protocol. L2R Character Orientated Protocol. Layer 3 (of a communications protocol). Link Adaptation. Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freely without updating the location register. An LA may comprise one or several base station areas. Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is an operator defined code identifying the location area.
L2R
LAC
13-36
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
LAI
Location Area Identity. The information indicating the location area in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM is continuously updated to reflect the current location of the subscriber. Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a) lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group, (c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switched telecommunications network, but may be connected to one. LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LAN to/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc. Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhanced version of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks. Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol that operates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture. LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entities across the frame relay network. The D-channel carries signalling information for circuit switching. Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link access procedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobile communications system. See OSI-RM and Physical Layer. See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer. See OSI-RM and Network Layer. See OSI-RM and Transport Layer. See OSI-RM and Session Layer. See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer. See OSI-RM and Application Layer. Inductor Capacitor. A type of filter. Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links in and out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF and RSL. See also LCP. Local Communications Network. A communication network within a TMN that supports data communication functions (DCFs) normally at specified reference points q1 and q2. LCNs range from the simple to the complex. LCN examples include point-to-point connections and networks based on star and bus topologies. Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIA board device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has been equipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped, processors are allocated by the software. Location Services Local Exchange. Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light when current passes through it. Depending on the material used the colour can be visible or infrared.
LAN
LAPDm
LCN
LCP
LCS LE LED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-37
Version 1 Rev 3
LF
Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screen down one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has a decimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances the paper one line. Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC data block, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block. Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of information units: the subscribers national ISDN/MSISDN number; the country code; optionally, subaddress information. In a full ISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the address information necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber. The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party. The connected line identity is the line identity of the connected party. Logical Link Control. Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry information defining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal. Traffic channel with capacity lower than a Bm. LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to a LAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarms are generated by the GPROC. Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the deviations. Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed up the search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRN allocation is done on a per cell basis. Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBM compatible PC. Low Noise Amplifier. An amplifier with low noise characteristics. Last Number Dialled. An area in which a mobile station may move freely without updating the location register. A location area may comprise one or several base station areas. Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analog signals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system in which the value of the signal at each sample time is predicted to be a linear function of the past values of the quantified signal. Local PLMN. Link Quality Control. Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS location information is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers. Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system). Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a listener will perceive the background noise picked up by the microphone. Long Term Average. The value required in a BTSs GCLK frequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock.
LI LI
LMS LMSI
LPC
LTA
13-38
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Local Terminal Emulator. Long Term Predictive. Line Terminating Unit. Local Units. Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS when it detects that it has entered a new location area. Length and Value.
M - MUX
M M M-Cell M&TS Mandatory. Mega (106). Motorola Cell. Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of Network Management software which (1) collects and displays alarms, (2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3) activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC). Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to an MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence. Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions related to the management of the common transmission resources. These include the packet data physical channels and their radio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes are supported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and fixed allocation. Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted away from buildings or above rooftop level. Mobile Additional Function. Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automatic service which searches for the first available mobile user out of a defined group. Mobile Allocation Index. Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time. MAINTenance. Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hopping sequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell. Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). The inter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs. Mobile Application Part Processor. Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes. Megabits per second. Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is the inter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each card cage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as an MCAP Server.
MA MAC
MAI MAIDT MAINT MAIO MAP MAPP MB, Mbyte Mbit/s MCAP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-39
Version 1 Rev 3
Mobile Country Code. The first three digits of the IMSI, used to identify the country. Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simple data entry and retrieval. Malicious Call Identification supplementary service. This feature is supported by a malicious call trace function by printing the report at the terminating MSC when the mobile subscriber initiates a malicious call trace request. Modulation and Coding Scheme. Motorola Customer Support Centre. Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon). Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. The software subtype representation of the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) for the MCU-m. Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface) allows the OSI Processor to communicate between the Network Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for network configuration, events and alarms. mobile Management entity - Data Link layer. Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00). Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which does not contain subscriber related information. Services may be accessed while the equipment, capable of surface movement within the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts at unspecified points. Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A function which possesses the capability to detect elementary anomalies and convey them to the supervision process. MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames in which the position of each frame can be identified by reference to a multiframe alignment signal. Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF. MultiFunction block. Management. Manager. Message Handling System. The family of services and protocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mail transfer among local mail systems. Mobile Handling Service. Mega-Hertz (106). Maintenance Information. Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database. There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB.
MDL ME ME
MEF
MF
13-40
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MIC Microcell
Mobile Interface Controller. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted below rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffraction and scattering around buildings, the main propagation is within street canyons. minute(s). micro-second (10-6). Micro Base Control Unit. The BCU is the Macro/Microcell implementation of a BTS site controller. Management Information Tree. A file on the Motorola OMC-R. The MIT file effectively monitors data on every device and every parameter of each device that is in the current versions of software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text file on the OMC-R. The MIT file also contains the hierarchical relationships between the network devices. Man Machine. See MMI. Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization, location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, ID confidentiality, paging, handover, etc. Mobile Management Entity. Middle Man Funnel process. Man Machine Interface. The method by which the user interfaces with the software to request a function or change parameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, or an LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrieve device status, take modules out of service and put modules into service. A machine configured to use the OMC-R software from an MMI server. MMI client/MMI server. A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-R software. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients to mount. Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI. Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link) Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fifth and optionally sixth digits of the IMSI, used to identify the network. MaiNTenance. Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS. Mobile Originated. Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Motorola OMAP.
MM MM
MOMAP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-41
Version 1 Rev 3
MoU
Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoU usually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding as well as the general responsibilities and obligations of each party in a proposed venture. It has little legal significance except to indicate the parties commitments and acts as an aid to interpreting the parties intentions. There are various types of MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorola units comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectual property MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patent rights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the terms and conditions of a product or service transfer. Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC). (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive]. Master Processor MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTY provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a multi-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication with more than one party. MultiPleXed. Micro Radio Control Unit. Mobile Roaming Number. Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriber handset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriber equipment, such as facsimile machines, etc. Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre. The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls the location registration and handover procedures for all except inter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlled inter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch. Mobile Station Class Mark. Mobile Station Control Unit. millisecond (.001 second). Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2 Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS. Mobile Station Identification Number. The part of the IMSI identifying the mobile station within its home network. Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile number (see also IMSI). Uniquely defines the mobile station as an ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code (CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the Subscriber Number (SN). Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by the MSC to service and track a visiting subscriber. Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signal unit containing a service information octet and a signalling information field which is retransmitted by the signalling link control, if it is received in error.
MSC
MSRN MSU
13-42
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MT MT (0, 1, 2)
Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destined for an MS. Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates the radio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminal equipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission. MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1 is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface and MT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface. Mean Time Between Exceptions. Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected system reliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failure rates of various components of the system. MTBF is usually expressed in hours. Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslot that is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the A interface between the MSC and the BSC. Mobile-To-Mobile (call). Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channel signaling system that transfers signal messages and performs associated functions, such as error control and signaling link security. Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a short message from a message handling system to a mobile. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be received whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance time divided by the total number of corrective maintenance actions during a given period of time. Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-frame multiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframe with a period of 3060/13 ms. Mark Up. Multi User Mobile Station. Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into an aggregate signal to be transported via a single transmission channel.
MTBE MTBF
MTL
MTM MTP
MT/PP
MTTR
Multiframe
MU MUMS MUX
NACK - nW
NACK, Nack N/W NB NBIN NCC No Acknowledgement Network. Normal Burst (see Normal burst). A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generation algorithm. Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of the BSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC and BSIC.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-43
Version 1 Rev 3
NCELL NCH
Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell. Notification CHannel. Part of the downlink element of the CCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast calls and notification messages. Network Cell Reselection Manager. No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning the column contains unique values (used only with indexed columns). National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC is allocated to each GSM PLMN. Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurs when a call is about to be offered and the maximum number of total calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, the total number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, one for a held call and one for call waiting. Network Element (Network Entity). A piece of telecommunications equipment that provides support or services to the user. Network Element Function block. A functional block that communicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored, or controlled, or both. Norme Europennes de Telecommunications. An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMC and use it to carry out a network frequency replan. See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requests from the Transport Layer and issues service requests to the Data Link Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means of transferring variable length data sequences from a source to a destination via one or more networks while maintaining the quality of service requested by the Transport Layer. The Network Layer performs network routing, flow control, segmentation/desegmentation, and error control functions. Network Function. Network File System. A file system that is distributed over a computer network. Also, a file system, on a single computer, that contains the low-level networking files for an entire network. Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. It detects problems by monitoring network statistics and events via the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statistics and network configuration data to try to determine the cause of the detected problems. Network Interface Board. Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the form of a circuit card that provides network access. Network Independent Clocking. Network Information Service. It allows centralised control of network information for example hostnames, IP addresses and passwords.
NCRM ND
NDC NDUB
NE
NEF
NF NFS
NHA
13-44
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
N-ISDN
Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services include basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rate interface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI). Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps. Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interface functions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, and buffering, required for communications to and from a network. Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI. See Network Layer. Network LinK processor(s). Newton metres. Network Management (manager). NM is all activities which control, monitor and record the use and the performance of resources of a telecommunications network in order to provide telecommunication services to customers/users at a certain level of quality. Network Management Application Service Element. Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoring and control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linked to subordinate OMC nodes. National Mobile Station Identification number, or, National Mobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC and the MSIN. Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the worlds first automatic international mobile telephone system. No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the column must contain a value in all rows. A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot. Number Plan Identifier. Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented by one significant condition and zeros are represented by another, with no neutral or rest condition. Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration made by an application which specifies its desired listening criteria. The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number. Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddress ranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses. Network Service Provider. A national or regional company that owns or maintains a portion of the network and resells connectivity. Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI, which provides different network maps giving visual indication of the network configuration and performance, and how the different network management functions are implemented by the OMC-R. Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically tests all alive NS-VCs on a PICP board. Network Service - Virtual Circuit.
NIU
NIU-m NL NLK Nm NM
NMASE NMC
NMSI
NSAP
NSP
NSS
NST NS-VC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-45
Version 1 Rev 3
NT
Network Termination. Network equipment that provides functions necessary for network operation of ISDN access protocols. Non Transparent. NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engaged in harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe. Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol is capable of synchronizing distributed clocks within milliseconds over long time periods. # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used in this manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire 2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCM channels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th Generation Language. Closer to human languages than typical high-level programming languages. most 4GLs are used to access databases. Network User Access. Network User Identification. National User Part. (part of SS7). NonVolatile. Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random access memory which is made into non-volatile storage either by having a battery permanently connected, or, by saving its contents to EEPROM before turning the power off and reloading it when power is restored. Nano-Watt (10-9).
NT NTAAB NTP
Numbers
nW
O - Overlap
O OA Optional. Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG. Operation, Administration, & Management. Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning. Operations and Maintenance. Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which a telecommunication connection is being established whilst the RF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied. Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from placing calls to other members of that group. Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock source used for frequency synchronization. Optional for operators to implement for their aim.
OCB
OCXO OD
13-46
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
% OverFlow. IDS shutdown state. IDS normal operating state. Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must be cleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition that caused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent. Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modify and carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSS binary files. Overall Loudness Rating. Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7 standard) (was OAMP). Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of the GSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control of the PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlled by the specific OMC. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium) Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part. Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC). Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML provides communication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR for transferring network management (O&M) data. Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC. Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC). Operation and Maintenance SubSystem. Out Of Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state indicates the physical device is out of service. This state is reserved for physical communication links. Also, identifies a telephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS device software to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service. Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) origination point of the message. Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset. Operating System. The fundamental program running on a computer which controls all operations. Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure for communications networks standardized by the ISO. The standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate and exchange information with any other OSI-compliant system.
OLM
OPC
ORAC OS OSI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-47
Version 1 Rev 3
OSI RM
OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digital communications between application processes running in distinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure of seven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at the request of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests more basic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - Physical Layer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer, Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer. Operation Systems Function block. Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI used for the Motorola OMC-R MMI. Operator Services System. Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system to another as soon as they are received by the sending system. A system using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of a call before it starts to send the digits to the next system. This is the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a given call are sent at one time. See en bloc.
PA - PXPDN
P1, P2, P3 PA PAB PABX Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3. Power Amplifier. Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS. Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatic telephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange and also calls to and from the public telephone network. Packet Associated Control Channel. A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals, that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole. The process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only, and upon completion of the transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of other traffic. Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware device that allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switching to use a packet switching network. It assembles data into packets for transmission, and disassembles the packets on arrival. The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructure attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before any other network-initiated procedure can take place. CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network. Packet Braodcast Control channel. Processor Bus.
PAD
Paging
13-48
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
PBX
Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBX is a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only a manual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) does not have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange (PABX) may or may not have a switchboard. Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-user microcomputer designed to be operated by one person at a time. PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located at every PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident on the master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of the status of every device and every software process at the site. Packet Common Control Channel. Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providing point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Provides simultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area. Paging Channel Network. Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium over which the information is carried. In the case of GSM radio communications this would be the Air Interface. Each RF carrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) used for MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interface the physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer. Packet Control Interface. Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connecting peripherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, though it is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus. Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal is sampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a fixed reference) of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to a digital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in the presence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physical bearer of PCM. PCU Configuration Management. pCM is a GWM process. It distributes all database changes performed at the BSC to the PCU boards. Personal Communications Network. Any network supporting PCS, but in particular DCS1800. Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correction suitable for use on links with long transmission delays, such as satellite links.
PC
pCA
PCCCH PCH
PCHN PCHN
PCI PCI
PCM
pCM
PCN PCR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-49
Version 1 Rev 3
PCS
The U. S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) term used to describe a set of digital cellular technologies being deployed in the U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA
(also called IS-95), and North American TDMA (also called IS-136) air interfaces. PCS System Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, a collection of facilities that provides some combination of personal mobility, terminal mobility, and service profile management. Note: As used here, "facilities" includes hardware, software, and network components such as transmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities, and databases. A cellular phone network using the higher frequency range allocated in countries such as the USA. It operates on the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and 1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit). Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRS with packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, and packet segmentization and packetization across the Frame Relay link with the SGSN. Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess. Potential difference. Voltage. Protocol Discriminator field. The first octet of the packet header that identifies the protocol used to transport the frame. Public Data. See PDN. Power Distribution Board. Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCH and PDTCH logical channels. Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR). Public Data Network. A network established and operated by a telecommunications administration, or a recognized private operating agency, for the specific purpose of providing data transmission services for the public. Packet Data Protocol. Packet Data Traffic Channels Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of the Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Protected Data Unit. Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit of data, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network.
PCS1900
PCU
PDU PDU
13-50
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
PEDC Peg
Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network in Europe. A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic. Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource. Each time the device or resource is used the peg count is incremented. Modifying a statistical value. PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP. PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at the PCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC have a local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications (SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSC and generates messages to pCA for device transitions as needed, based on faults reported. Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequency range, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit). Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassembles packets. PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer. Packet Handler Interface. See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of seven hierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the Data Link Layer. The major functions and services of the layer are: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to a communications medium; (b) participation in the process of sharing communication resources among multiple users; and, (c) conversion between the representation of digital data in user equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted over a communications channel. Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling name information. Depending on database settings, the PI may prevent the called party from seeing the identity of the calling party. Packet Immediate Assignment. A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted within a building. Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardware component, the PICP is a DPROC board used for network interfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statement made by the supplier of an implementation or system claimed to conform to a given specification, stating which capabilities have been implemented. Process IDentifier/Process ID. PCM Interface Module (MSC). Personal Identification Number. A password, typically four digits entered through a telephone keypad. Problem Identification Number.
PI
PICS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-51
Version 1 Rev 3
PIX
Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarm interface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means of wiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the base equipment. Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing. A statement made by a supplier or implementor of an implementation under test (IUT) which contains information about the IUT and its testing environment which will enable a test laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT. Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is a not-null, non-duplicate index. See Presentation Layer. Unciphered data. Frequency planning tool. Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the BTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information is transferred within a data stream and the receiver derives the signal element timing by locking its local clock source to the received timing information. Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communications network. Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enables the user to produce reports specific to the performance of the network. Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediate action is necessary. See also DMA. PCI Mezzanine Card. Packet Management Report. Pseudo MMS. Performance Management User Interface. PCM MUltipleXer. Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee. Prsentation des Normes Europennes. Presentation rules of European Standards. Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular network is connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiple POIs. Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service without special features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc. Peak-to-peak. Point-to-Point. Parts per billion. PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board. The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus. The PPB and MPROC are paired boards. Primitive Procedure Entity.
PIXT or PIXIT
PLMN PM
PPE
13-52
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Parts per million (x 10-6). Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specified for each basic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be used when no explicit CUG index is received by the network. See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to service requests from the Application Layer and issues service requests to the Session Layer. It relieves the Application Layer of concern regarding syntactical differences in data representation within the end-user systems. A cell which is already optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal to the frequency type of the coincident cell. Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. It performs all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL power control and timing advance. Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, after being written to once, becomes a read-only memory. Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component, the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packet resources at the PCU and is the processor where all of the radio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed to PRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interface scheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels. Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterion for cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge is defined by adding margins so that the minimum service quality is fulfilled with a certain probability. Puncturing Scheme. Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a fault management function. It periodically sends messages to BSSs requesting information on their current state. This verifies whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS fails to respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R will generate an alarm for that BSS. Packet System Information. Presentation Services Access Point. PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. It periodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliability of the system. Power Supply Module. PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains data paths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC. PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS. Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switching and PDN.
Presentation Layer
Primary Cell
PRM
PROM PRP
Ps
PS PSA
PSM pSM
PSP PSPDN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-53
Version 1 Rev 3
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic land line telecommunications network. It is usually accessed by telephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchange trunks, and data arrangements. Power Supply Unit. Pure Sine Wave. Packet Timing Advance Control Channel Public Telecommunications Operator. Packet Timeslot Reconfiguration. Packet Uplink Assignment. Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of the Home unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCT is stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set by the subscriber and may exceed the value published by the HPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on the charges raised by the HPLMN. Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology, Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit establishment and tear-down. See also SVC. Pass Word. Power. Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.
PVC
PW PWR PXPDN
Quiescent mode
13-54
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
R - RXU
R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relative to the maximum allowed output power of the highest power class of MS (A). RAndom mode request information field. Radio Access. Routing Area. Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50. Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH. Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to originate a call or respond to a page. Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobile station to request access to the network. See also RAB. A term applied to the transmission of electromagnetically radiated information from one point to another, usually using air or vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagnetic wave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies and infrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission. Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-access memory in which information can be stored, retrieved and modified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., its contents are lost if power is removed). RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sent by the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process. Radio Access Technology Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface. Rate Adaptation. Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motorola diagnostic facility). Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number of bits in error to the total number of bits received, within error detected speech frames defined as good. The measurement period over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During this period, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated. By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to an RBER Quality number between 0 and 7. Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-located with the BSC that controls it. Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU. Radio Channel Identifier. The unique identifier of the radio channel portion of the circuit path. Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS address used in the RSS (channel number) to the address used in Layer 3 in the BSC CP. Radio Control Processor.
RA RA RA RA250
RAM
RCP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-55
Version 1 Rev 3
RCU
Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU is now obsolete, see DRCU. Receiver. Requirements Database. Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). The database management system for the OMC-R database. Restricted Digital Information. Radio Digital Interface System. Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable 3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrier and injection frequency synthesis. Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a unique identifier, the distinguished name, for a particular network element. RECommendation. Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated as a neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional and two-way neighbour. The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC in order to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MS first activates or moves into a new service area. REJect(ion). RELease. Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding. RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech at bit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s. RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. See Full Rate. A combiner device which houses two processors (for paired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See also COMB Resynchronize/resynchronization. REQuest. The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before channel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference. Varies between cell configuration type and channel type. The pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize interference between cells and sectors within the pattern area. A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from a binary object database. See Radio Frequency. Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RF spectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centre frequency. Radio Front End (module). Receiver Front End (shelf).
RDN
Registration
RFE RFE
13-56
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II. Radio Frequency Interference. Radio Frequency Module. Reduced TDMA Frame Number. Reserved for Future Use. Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonly to connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN), especially Ethernets. Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessor that recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types, allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds. Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performs configuration management, fault management, and some performance management procedures at the NEs. The RL software manages the X.25 connection for remote login. The circuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE. Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSD to release a connection. Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLC function processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer. RF Link Manager. Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR. ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to release a connection. Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematical method of defining the effective voltage or current of an AC wave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peak value. Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator. It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSS sites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrial signalling and traffic circuits required. Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence. Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability. Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular system other than the one from which service is subscribed. Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fast access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or modification of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage - it retains its contents even when the power is switched off. Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries a message between devices over an association established by ASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC). Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslot in the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviour of the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance.
RISC
RL
RMSU
ROSE
Roundtrip
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-57
Version 1 Rev 3
RPE RPE-LTP
Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP. Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSM digital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplified RPE codec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s to provide toll quality speech. Recognised Private Operating Agency. Private telecommunications operator recognised by the appropriate telecommunications authority. Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of the OMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed only for privileged accounts. Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM management layer. The functions provided by RR include paging, cipher mode set, frequency redefinition, assignments, handover and measurement reports. Receive Ready. Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages through Call Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channels as controlled by the CRM. Radio Resource Switch Manager. Recommended Standard 232. The interface between a terminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serial data. Standard serial interface. Radio System Entity. Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between the BSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot with a LAPD protocol. Radio System Link Function. Radio System Link Processor. Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS). Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned from a transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strength between the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink. Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI defines the regions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZI are:The Country Code (CC) which identifies the country in which the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code (NDC) which identifies the GSM PLMN in that country,The Zone Code (ZC) which identifies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within that PLMN. Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used to fine-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tuned cavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed. Remote Terminal Emulator. Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supports the air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. When equipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs must be equipped.
RPOA
RPR
RR
RR RRSM
RRSM RS232
RSE RSL
RSZI
RTC
RTE RTF
13-58
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
RTF RTS
Receive Transmit Functions. Request to Send. A handshaking signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 to indicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready for transmission. See also CTS. Rack Unit. System processor operating mode. Receive(r). Receive window buffer. Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcoding is performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would be at or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which the transcoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one 64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required for interconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR. Receive Function (of the RTF). Received signal level. An indication of received signal level based on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEV values related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It is necessary for these levels to attain sufficient accuracy for the correct functioning of the system. Received signal level downlink. Received signal level uplink. Received signal quality. An indication of the received signal quality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures the received signal quality, which is specified in terms of BER before channel decoding averaged over the reporting period of length of one SACCH multiframe. Received signal quality downlink. Received signal quality uplink. Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remote transcoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcoder site.
RXF RXLEV
S7- SYSGEN
S7 S/W SABM SABME See SS7. SoftWare. Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message which establishes the signalling link over the air interface. SABM Extended.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-59
Version 1 Rev 3
SACCH
Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used by the MS for conveying power control and timing advance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI and link quality reports in the uplink direction. Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4. Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Half rate. A brand of trunk test equipment. Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs of a layer are defined as gates through which services are offered to an adjacent higher layer. System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. It monitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) and on-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty or degrading hardware and software (through the use of audit tests) and notifies the Alarms handling software of the condition. Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). The OSI term for the component of a network address which identifies the individual application on a host which is sending or receiving a packet. Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of an input transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acoustic waves, which then travel through the solid propagation medium to the output transducer where they are reconverted to electrical signals. SAW band pass filters are used for sorting signals by frequency. Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst). Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of the communication path between the GPROCs and LANX cards in a cage. Service Centre (used for Short Message Service). Service Code. System Change Control Administration. Software module which allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC). Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7). Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM). Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel used to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs and identification of base stations. Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager. Serial Communication Interface Processor. Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other processors within the switch requesting status displays in the form of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM maps the status display requests into specific commands to the status control interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights.
SAP
SAPI
SAW
SB SBUS
13-60
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining a particular physical channel in a BS. Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity). Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independent standard for system-level interfacing between a computer and intelligent devices including hard disks, floppy disks, CD-ROM, printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up to seven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) on the computers bus. Slim Channel Unit. Slim Channel Unit for GSM900. Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS to BTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCH is used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, location updating and SMS point to point. Specification Description Language. A method for visually depicting the functionality of call processing, operations and maintenance software. Sub-rate Data Multiplexor SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validate real-time, state-based product software designs. Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sent by a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted to a peer service user semantically unchanged. Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International Monetary Fund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for the unit of account for a number of other international organizations and as a basis for private financial instruments. The SDR is based on the values of the euro, U .S. dollar, Jap
SDL
SDR
anese yen and pound sterling. SE Secondary Cell Support Entity. See SEF. A cell which is not optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band the same as that of its own frequency type. Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directly involved in the telecommunication process. They include fault localisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00).
SEF
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-61
Version 1 Rev 3
Session Layer
See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requests from the Presentation Layer and issues service requests to the Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managing the dialogue between end-user application processes. It provides for either duplex or half-duplex operation and establishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, and restart procedures. Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is that every mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence of frequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequency hopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobile station transmits (or receives) on a fixed frequency during one time slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the next TDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring other base stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1 ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive and transmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies. Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control, transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track of the individual MS locations, and performs security functions and access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via a Frame Relay network. Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screening indicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radio connection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of the MS and hence determine either whether a particular network initiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of a network initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SS screening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SS operation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection. Service Interworking. Part of the IWF. Supplementary Information. System Information. Supplementary Information A. Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SID frame. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech bursts and serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. In order to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RX side, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also during speech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving the measurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem (RSS). Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit that carry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF always contains a label. See SS7. Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which is inserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part of the MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN), other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 and A8. Single Inline Memory module.
SFH
SGSN
SI
SI SI SI SIA SID
SIF
SIMM
13-62
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
SIMM SIO
System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuit board providing additional RAM for a computer. Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a message signal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-service field. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling message specifying the User Part type. BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site. Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTL levels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to external devices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics). Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondary key indicates an additional index and/or usage as a composite key. See Session Layer. Signalling Link. The signalling links between the various network elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio Signalling Link (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL), OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML), Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC to BSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL). Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIP and peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sent serially in a bit-synchronous format. Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the land to mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for the customers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated from the send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses. Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from the MSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM. Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringing an MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message to the MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message. Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MS terrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to the radio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager in the BSS software. Summing Manager. System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO 9596). OSI terminology for a software Management Information Server that manages a network. System Management Application Service Element. Short Message Cell Broadcast. Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive Short Messages. The SME may be located in a fixed network, an MS, or a SC. See also SMS. Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSM system and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities, the committee was renamed SMG in 1992.
SITE SIX
SK
SL SL
SLNK
SLR
SLTA SLTM
SM
SM SMAE
SMG
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-63
Version 1 Rev 3
SMP
Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola program designed to ensure the highest quality of software with the highest level of support. Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wireless service that enables the transmission of alphanumeric messages between mobile subscribers and external systems such as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. It transfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, between Smts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service in which short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs. SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. traffic reports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged by the MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is only possible in idle mode. The geographical area over which each message is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, by agreement with the provider of the information. Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is an interworking unit between stationary networks and the GSM Network. It acts as a store and forward centre for short messages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two different point-to-point services have been defined: Mobile Originated (MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message always originates or terminates in the GSM network. This means that short messages can never be sent between two users both located in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC and Smt. Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC and SMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one being the Computer Access Interface which provides services for external computers communicating with SMS-SCs through the Computer Access Protocol. Subscriber Number. SeND. SeNDeR. Serial NumbeR. Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement which prevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG. A complete set of software and firmware objects including the database object. Service Provider. The organisation through which the subscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. This may be a network operator or possibly a separate body. Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7 network. Special Product. SPare.
SMS
SMSCB
SMS-SC
SMS/PP
Smt
SP SP SP
13-64
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
SPARC
Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bit microprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that is based on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC). SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardware used with UNIX-based operating systems. Signalling Point Code. Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferential CUG, on a per call basis. Signalling Point Inaccessible. Single Path Preselector. Signal Quality Error. Structured Query Language. The standard language for relational database management systems as adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) and the International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989). Service Request Distributor. Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated by the MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticate the MS. Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to, a basic telecommunication service. System Simulator. ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Also known as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard defines the procedures and protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchange information over a digital signalling network to effect wireless (cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control. SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSA message is sent to concerned destinations to inform those destinations that a subsystem which was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.712 para 1.15). Site System Audits Processor. Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriber selects a supplementary service control from the menu in a GSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sending the network the appropriate functional signalling message. Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the network indicator and two spare bits. SCCP Switch Manager. Signalling State Machine. SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) may contain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has a unique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR). Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class 4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN for switching signalling, control and handoff.
SRD SRES
SS SS SS7
SSA
SSAP SSC
SSP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-65
Version 1 Rev 3
SSP
Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSP message is sent to concerned destinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinations of the failure of a subsystem. Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and the LRs. Statistical ANalysis (processor). STATistics. Statistics. System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timing functions for the GPROC. Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking. Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor. Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone network that routes messages between exchanges and between exchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routing information. Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferable entity used to convey information on a signalling link. Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS was renamed Solaris. 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26 broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s). User account that can access all files, regardless of protection settings, and control all user accounts. Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used in Horizonmacro). Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set up and used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once the communication between the two hosts is complete, the SVC disappears. See also PVC. SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall management authority for all in-service service circuits. Software Version Number. The SVN allows the ME manufacturer to identify different software versions of a given type approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV. Software. SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handled through a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMC independently through the FCP. SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sends GPRS system information messages over the BCCH. synchronize/synchronization. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize its frame to that of the received signal.
SVM SVN
SW SWFM
13-66
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Synthesizer hopping
Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping in which the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency to frequency. SYStem. SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading a configuration database into a BTS.
SYS SYSGEN
T -TxBPF
T T T T1 Timer. Transparent. Type only. Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatted data at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network. companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks as well as interconnections between an organizations PBX or LAN and the telco. Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits (See BIB). Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminal adaptation functions (see GSM 04.02). See Timing Advance. Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV. Total Access Communication System. European analogue cellular system. Terminal Adaptation Function. Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists of RF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining. See CCB. Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface (physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standard defined by the ATM Forum. To Be Determined. Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision of TBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and user data between the network and an MS. Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containing technical requirements and procedures. TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDM backplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDM highway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (if they exist).
T43
TAXI
TBD TBF
TBR TBUS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-67
Version 1 Rev 3
TC
Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structure above the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP service interface) up to the application layer including common application service elements but not the specific application service elements using them. TC is structured as a Component sub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer. Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of the SS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certain services. TATI Control Board. Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either encoded speech or user data. A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate. A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s. A full rate Speech TCH. A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate. A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A half rate Speech TCH. Transceiver Control Interface. Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol deals only with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees delivery of data and also guarantees that packets will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent. See also IP and TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates on the OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP. Technical Commitee Technical Report. Transceiver Control Unit. Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon. Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combines data streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in a set. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of time slots over a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems, such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created for each conversation or data stream. Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for delivering digital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividing a radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots to multiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can support multiple, simultaneous data channels. TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDU is capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors.
TCAP TCB TCH TCH/F TCH/F2.4 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/FS TCH/H TCH/H2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/HS TCI TCP
TCP/IP
TDMA
TDU
13-68
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user. Terminal endpoint identifier. A number that identifies a specific connection endpoint within a service access point. Terminal Equipment Identity. TEMPorary. TEST control processor. Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocol software for handling payload information transfer and for providing signalling communications between the control function and external systems. TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route. TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessible route. Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. It uses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used by servers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers. Transaction Identifier. The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits are sent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots. See also ARFCN. A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS to advance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as to compensate for propagation delay. See Transport Layer. Temporary Logical Link Identifier. Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed of three fields: a type identifier, a length indicator, and content octets. Traffic Manager. TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interface from IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF. Traffic Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system tools to be used by traffic engineering and switch maintenance personnel to determine if the system is operating correctly. TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups, service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data.
TFA TFP
TFTP
TI Timeslot
Timing advance
TL TLLI TLV
TM TMI TMM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-69
Version 1 Rev 3
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network. The physical entities required to implement the Network Management functionality for the PLMN. Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TS as a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfaces that would allow a network to be managed consistently across all network element suppliers. The concept has led to a series of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways to define and address network elements. TMN uses the OSI Management Standards as its framework. TMN applies to wireless communications and cable TV as well as to private and public wired networks. Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriber to process a call. May be changed between calls and even during a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality. Timeslot Number. Tunneling of Messages. Type Of Number. Channels which carry users speech or data. See also TCH. Equivalent to an erlang. Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timing recovery and channel equalization in the receiver. See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requests from the Session Layer and issues service requests to the Network Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transfer of data between end users, thus relieving the upper layers from any concern with providing reliable and cost-effective data transfer. Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines which timeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of the GPRS traffic. Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encoded voice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN. Terrestrial Resource Management. TopCell Radio unit. Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve full duplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels according to specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH) is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on one RF carrier. Technical Specification. TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunication provider. TimeSlot (see Timeslot). Training Sequence 1. Training Sequence 2. TimeSlot Acquisition.
TMSI
TN TOM TON Traffic channels Traffic unit Training sequence Transport Layer
TRS
13-70
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
TimeSlot Assignment. Transceiver Speech & Data Interface. Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at the centre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronize to the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bits which is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There are eight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operating with the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allow the receiver to identify the correct signal. TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within a TDM stream. Transceiver Speech and Data Interface. Transceiver Station Manager. TRAU SyNc. Timeslot SWitch. Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programming language endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites for telecommunications systems. Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductor technology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits. TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal). Traffic Unit. Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation of SS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications. Type and Value. See Reciprocal neighbour. Transmit(ter). Transmit window buffer. Transmit Function. See RTF. Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in the MS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONF parameters. Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.
TU50
TxBPF
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-71
Version 1 Rev 3
U - UUS
UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MS to the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when a call is being cleared. Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all of the characters commonly used in computer applications. Unrestricted Digital Information. User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocol that, like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network. It is used primarily for broadcasting messages over a network. User Determined User Busy. Uplink Frame Error. Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum is the band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz. Unnumbered Information (Frame). Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is the worldwide organisation for cooperation among railway companies. Its activities encompass all fields related to the development of rail transport. User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user. Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS). UpLink. UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocks into LLC frames. Air interface. Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The European implementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, which is part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band and offers global roaming and personalized features. Designed as an evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimedia data rates up to 2 Mbps are expected. A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely used as the master control program in workstations and especially servers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed to government and academic institutions, causing it to be ported to a wider variety of machine families than any other operating system. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with open systems. Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced for design purposes in order to separate the speech transcoder impairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS. Up to Date. Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTS receives).
UNIX
UPCMI
UPD Uplink
13-72
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
UPS
Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is inserted between a primary power source, such as a commercial utility, and the primary power input of equipment to be protected, e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating the effects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backup power is used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. User Part Unavailable. That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of the GMSK signal. Uplink State Flag. Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSD mechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator defined application to communicate in a way which is transparent to the MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanism allows development of PLMN specific supplementary services. UMTS Radio Access Network User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUS supplementary service allows a mobile subscriber to send/receive a limited amount of information to/from another PLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel in association with a call to the other subscriber.
USF USSD
UTRAN UUS
V - VTX host
V VA Value only. Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm to compute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a model given a sequence of observed outputs. Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence or absence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX. Videotex Access Point. Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech (or other signals which can be transmitted via the speech codec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predefined geographical area to all or a group of service subscribers located in this area. See Virtual Circuit. Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clock frequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltage presented at its input. The frequency changes when the voltage changes. Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator. Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporary display of computer output data. Monitor. Voice Group Call Service.
VC VCO
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-73
Version 1 Rev 3
Videotex
The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means of proper access points and standardized procedures, provides the access to data base information stored in host computers external to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks. A connection between two devices, that functions as though it is a direct connection, even though it may physically be circuitous. The term is used most frequently to describe connections between two hosts in a packet-switching network. Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element which provides a temporary register for subscriber information for a visiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC. Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placing between 100,000 and one million electronic components on a single chip. Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used). Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists of a speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveforms into narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer, which converts the digital signals into artificial speech sounds. Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducer and a keying relay connected so that the keying relay is actuated when sound, or voice energy above a certain threshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used to eliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter by using voice energy to turn on the transmitter Visited PLMN. Videotex Service Centre. Send state variable. Vehicular Speaker Phone. Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratio of maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern. Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatch between the transmission line and its load. The higher the VSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e., that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity. The components dedicated to Videotex service.
Virtual Circuit
VLR
VLSI
VMSC vocoder
VOX
VTX host
13-74
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
W - WWW
WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that provides data communications to a larger number of independent users than are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over a larger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may include physical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks, and T1 networks. Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementary services have the option of the subscriber using a password. If a password check is done with an incorrect password, the WPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed, the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three, the subscriber will have to register a new password with the service provider. Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnel execute input and output transactions for network management purposes. Work Station Function block. World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-based information service composed of Internet host computers that provide on-line information in a specific hypertext format. WWW servers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatted documents using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP. Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.
WPA
WS
WSF WWW
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-75
Version 1 Rev 3
X - X Window
X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly used protocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). The X.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks to communicate through an intermediary computer at the network layer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-link and physical-layer protocols defined in the OSI communication model. A communications link which conforms to X.25 specifications and uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links). Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications link between the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS. Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver. Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processing equipment required to perform GSM-defined speech encoding and decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speech transcoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. See also RXCDR. The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding at the BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board. Interchangeable with the GDP board. Transfer. eXchange IDentifier. X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the X Window System. A user can have many different invocations of xterm running at once on the same display, each of which provides independent input and output for the process running in it (normally a shell). A specification for device-independent windowing operations on bitmap display devices.
XCDR board
X Window
ZC
ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identifies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within a PLMN.
13-76
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SYS04 - BSS Subsystem Planning TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
13-77